JP7096624B1 - Game table - Google Patents

Abstract

A game machine having a characteristic control means is provided. When a first error is detected by a first error detection means, a first error notification can be executed to notify that the first error has been detected; can execute a second error notification to notify that the second error has been detected when the second error is detected by the first error detection means, and the first error detection means detects the first error When a second error is detected by the second error detection means in (hereinafter referred to as "first case"), the first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed. Yes, in the first case, when the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed, the removal of the cause of the first error and the removal of the second error cause A first notification means is provided for ending the first error notification and continuing the second error notification when a release operation is performed once after performing the error notification. [Selection drawing] Fig. 53

Description

The present invention relates to a game table typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine.

Conventionally, for example, a slot machine is known as one of the game consoles. Some such slot machines are provided with control means for setting an advantageous state in favor of the player (see, for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-73461

However, there is room for improvement in the control means of the conventional game table.

An object of the present invention is to provide a game table having a characteristic control means.

In order to solve the above problems, the game console according to the present invention is
Error detection means that can detect errors and
The first notification means that can execute error notification,
A second notification means that can execute error notification,
A game console provided with a predetermined operating means capable of canceling the error notification.
The error detecting means is
Includes a first error detecting means capable of detecting a first error and a second error detecting means capable of detecting a second error.
The first notification means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detecting means, it is possible to execute the first error notification notifying that the first error has been detected.
When the second error is detected by the second error detecting means, it is possible to execute the second error notification notifying that the second error has been detected.
When the second error is detected by the second error detecting means while the first error is detected by the first error detecting means (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed.
In the first case, the cause of the first error is eliminated and the cause of the second error is caused while the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed. If the release operation is performed once after the removal of the above, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued .
The second notification means is a means for executing the first error notification in the first case but not executing the second error notification.
The first notification means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detecting means while the second error is detected by the second error detecting means (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"). The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed.
In the second case, the cause of the first error is removed and the cause of the second error is caused while the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed. If the release operation is performed once after the removal of the above, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued.
In the second case, the second notification means is a means for executing the first error notification but not executing the second error notification.
It is characterized by that.

According to the game console according to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game console having a feature in the control means.

It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a front view which shows the slot machine 100 in the state which the front door 102 is opened. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. (A) It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112) developed in a plane. (B) It is a figure which shows the type of the winning combination (including the operating combination), the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initial setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of setting change processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a device monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of setting value confirmation processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of other device monitoring processing. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the setting change mode in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the setting confirmation mode in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the display example 1 of a management screen in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the display example 2 of a management screen in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the display example 3 of a management screen in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the display example 4 of a management screen in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the display example 1 of an error notification in time series. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the display example 2 of the error notification in time series. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the management screen and the display example 1 of an error notification in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the management screen and the display example 2 of an error notification in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of the display of a setting history in chronological order. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of the display of an error history in chronological order. (A) It is a figure which showed the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is not displayed. (B) It is a figure which showed the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is displayed. It is a simple game flow showing the game state of the AT system. (A) It is a figure which showed the transition example of the effect state in an advantageous section. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the CZ determination table used for the CZ lottery in a normal stage. (C) It is a figure which showed an example of the CZ determination table used for the CZ lottery in stock time. It is a figure which showed the production example in the stock time in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the production example in a normal stage in chronological order. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows an example of the winning line of a slot machine 100. The circuit block diagram of the control unit is shown. It is a figure which shows the arrangement of the symbols applied to each reel (the left reel 110, the middle reel 111, the right reel 112) developed in a plane. It is a figure which shows the type of a winning combination, the name of a condition device, the symbol combination corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts, and remarks. (A) It is a figure which shows the symbol combination, the number of payouts, and remarks corresponding to small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) and small winning combination 5 (single piece combination). (B) It is a figure which shows the relationship between the push order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in the game which internally won the small winning combination 3 (push order bell), and the AT game. (C) It is a figure which shows the relationship between the push order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the setting suggestion effect A in the game which internally won the small combination 5 (one piece combination). (A) It is a time chart which showed an example of the game period of the high probability mode and the low probability mode of a setting suggestion effect A. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion effect A selection table used for the setting suggestion effect A lottery. (A) It is a time chart which showed an example of the game period of the high probability mode and the low probability mode of a setting suggestion effect B. (B) It is a figure which showed an example of the setting suggestion effect B selection table used for the setting suggestion effect B lottery. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) It is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. (B) It is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (C) It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (D) It is a flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. It is a figure which showed the effect example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the effect example 2 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order. It is a figure which showed the effect example of setting suggestion effect B in chronological order. It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). It is a front view which shows the slot machine 100 in the state which the front door 102 is opened. It is a circuit block diagram of a control unit. Main control unit It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the initial setting process (step S101) in the main process of the main control part of FIG. 41. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process of FIG. 42. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the device monitoring processing (step S408) in the main control part timer interrupt processing of FIG. 44. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the setting value confirmation process (step S501) in the device monitoring process of FIG. 45. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the other device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process of FIG. 45. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 1st sub-control unit 400. (A) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process. It is a flowchart of the timer interrupt processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500, and (d) is the flowchart of the image control processing of the 2nd sub-control unit 500. (A) is a diagram showing an operation example when the setting change is executed, and (B) is a diagram showing an operation example when the setting value confirmation is executed. (A) is a diagram showing an operation example when the front door 102 is closed during the setting change execution, and (B) is a diagram showing an operation example when the front door 102 is closed during the setting value confirmation execution. .. It is a figure which shows the operation example in the state which the setting key SW is ON. It is a figure which shows the operation example of error notification and error cancellation. (A) is a diagram showing an operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting change, and (B) is a diagram showing an operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation. It is a figure which shows the timing chart about error detection. It is a figure which shows the modification of the error notification and the error cancellation. It is a figure which shows the deformation example when the front door 102 is closed during the execution of setting value confirmation. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation for confirmation of a shutter. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation for confirmation of a speaker. It is a figure which shows an example of the operation for confirmation of a shutter.

<< Embodiment 1 >>
Hereinafter, the game console (slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and is a front door 1 that is attached to the main body 101 and the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101.
02 (door body) and. The front door 102 (door body) will be described later with reference to FIG.

Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112 (FIG. 4 (FIG. 4).
a) See). The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are the symbols 110 to 1 on each reel 110 to 1 when viewed from the player.
About three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of the twelve, and a total of nine symbols can be seen.

Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment,
Although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. note that,
Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, in an internal lottery described later).
It is a lamp that informs the player that he / she has been internally elected (special role) or that he / she is in a bonus game (during a special game state). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 tells the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game role, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp to inform you. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for staging.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals.
When a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start lamp 121 for notifying that the game start operation is possible is lit.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be. On the left side of the medal slot 141, the cross key 193a (second operation means, upper button), which is an operation means for selecting a menu, adjusting the volume, etc., on the management screen SD, the volume value display VD, etc., which will be described later. , A lower button, a right button, and a left button) and an OK button 193b (hereinafter, these may be collectively referred to as "cross button 193") are arranged.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 has various internal information (for example,
It is a display device for displaying the number of medals paid out during the bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a push order effect. In this example, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7.
It consists of a segment (SEG) indicator.

It is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the start lever 135 (operating means) and the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141, or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the start lever 135 is operated.
The reels 110 to 112 will start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 has a stop button (stop button) 137 to 139.
Is provided. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. A light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter, also referred to as "1 stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop. Operation (hereinafter, also referred to as "2 stop" or "2nd stop"), the last stop operation is the 3rd stop operation (hereinafter, also referred to as "2 stop")
Hereinafter, it is also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop". ).

Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order (or push order).

The operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is when the left stop button 137 is represented by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is represented by "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 is represented by "right or R". , (1) Left → Middle → Right operation order (left middle right or LCR), (2)
Left->right-> middle operation order (left-right middle or LRC), (3) middle->left-> right operation order (middle left-right or CLR), (4) middle->right-> left operation order (middle right left or CRL) , (5) Right->left-> middle operation order (right-left middle or RLC), (6) Right->middle-> left operation order (right middle left or RLC)
).

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game.
A staging device 160 is disposed on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the staging device 160.

The staging device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (display means) arranged behind the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 is in front of the slot machine 100. It has a structure that appears on the (player side).

The display means may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information, not just a liquid crystal display device, and may be, for example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, or an organic EL. Display, plasma display,
It may be a reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen.
Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

<Internal structure>
Next, the internal structure of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened.

The main body 101 has a top plate 261 and a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, and a bottom plate 26.
It is a box body that is surrounded by 4 and a back plate 242 and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Down,
Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged. A sub-control board storage case 220 containing a sub-control board is disposed on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side facing the main control board storage case 210. In addition, the side plate 260 on the right side when facing
Is attached to an external centralized terminal board 248 that is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key switch (first operating means; hereinafter, also referred to as “setting key SW”, not shown) that can be switched on and off by a rotation operation is provided. This setting key SW is an operation means for starting setting change and setting confirmation of the setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example) described later. Further, inside the main body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter, also referred to as "reset SW") capable of performing an operation for changing a setting (setting value changing operation) by a pressing operation is provided. This reset SW is an operation means that also functions as an error release switch capable of performing an operation (error elimination operation) for eliminating various errors described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operating means provided at positions that can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, and when the front door 102 (door body) is in the closed state. Is difficult or impossible to operate. In other words, it is an operation means that can be operated only by the manager (clerk, etc.) of the game store, and is an operation means that the player cannot operate.

Further, inside the main body 101, a set value display device 101a (FIG. 12) capable of displaying a set value can be displayed.
See). In this example, the set value display device 101a is composed of a 7-segment display. Details will be described later, but when the setting change operation is performed, the setting value display device 1
In 01a, the set value (one of the settings 1 to 6) is displayed, and when the set value is confirmed by operating the start lever 135, the set value is hidden. On the other hand, when the setting confirmation operation is performed, the setting value display device 101a displays a numerical value indicating the current setting value.

On the bottom plate 264, a medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals collected in a bucket)
Is arranged, a power supply device 252 having a power supply board is arranged above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112, and a power supply switch 2 is arranged in front of the power supply device 252.
44 is arranged. The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts it into a main control unit 300, a sub control unit 400, and 5 which will be described later.
It is supplied to each control unit such as 00 and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 264, and the power cord 264 connected to the power cord 264 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is a door body that is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101.

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened in the closed state by inserting the key held by the manager of the game store into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 1). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change from the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. ..

The side plate 260 on the right side of the main body 101 is provided with an optical sensor (detection means; hereinafter, also referred to as “open / close sensor”; not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part, and the light emitting of the opening / closing sensor. A light-shielding piece having a certain length provided on the front door 102 is configured to pass between the portion and the light receiving portion.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of various sensors 318 including the open / close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process described later. The front door 102 is closed, and the front door 102
When the light-shielding piece of the main body 101 moves to a position where light from the light projecting unit of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open / close sensor sends a signal (for example, a low-level signal) indicating that it is in the closed detection state to the main control unit 300. Output toward.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is not blocked, the open / close sensor indicates the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high-level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

That is, the open / close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state is in the closed detection state and the front door 102 is in the open state. In the case of, the detection state becomes the open detection state.

The "detection means" according to the present invention is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Further, it is not limited to the one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state are always switched according to the opening and closing of the door body, and even if the door body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the closed detection state. On the contrary, even if the door body is in the closed state, the detection state may be the one that can be changed to the open detection state.

Here, the open / close sensor according to this example has a front door (door body) 10 by performing a predetermined operation.
Even if 2 is in the open state, the detection state is configured to be the closed detection state. Specifically, when the front door 102 is in the open state, a light-shielding piece of a certain length is inserted between the light-emitting part and the light-receiving part of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 and fixed with tape or the like, and the main body is fixed. By blocking the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of 101, the detection state of the open / close sensor can be forcibly set to the closed detection state even when the front door 102 is in the open state.

The "predetermined operation" according to the present invention is not limited to this example, and for example, a DIP switch for setting the open / close sensor to the closed detection state may be provided, and the DIP switch may be operated as a predetermined operation. .. Further, when the detection means is configured by a magnetic sensor, the detection state of the open / close sensor may be changed to the closed detection state by bringing the magnets close to each other.

An effect device 160, an effect control board (not shown) for controlling the effect device 160, and a speaker 272 are provided above the symbol display window 113. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there is a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, and the medal selector 17
There is provided a passage 266 or the like through which medals pass when 0 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161. Further, a speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game.
And, according to the command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main effect and the first sub-control unit 400 transmit. It is composed of a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300
A basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300 is provided, and the basic circuit 302 stores the CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used during the internal lottery of the winning combination, a reel stop position, and the like. ROM 306 and R for temporarily storing data
It is equipped with AM308, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for ROM 306 and RAM 308.
This point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. CPU304
Uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. for example,
When the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz = 1. It becomes .504 ms.

The main control unit 300 receives 0 to 6 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a is received.
A random number value generation circuit 316 that derives numerical values in the range of 5535 (assuming that this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits) and a start signal (reset signal) are output when the power is turned on. The start signal output circuit 338 is provided, and the CPU 304 is the start signal output circuit 3.
When the start signal is input from 38, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

The random number value generation circuit 316 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. The random number value generation in the random number value generation circuit 316 can be roughly divided into two modes: counter mode and random number mode.
There are different ways. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number value, and derive this operation result as a random number value. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number value. In the random number value generation circuit 316, irregular values are acquired by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320. The random number value generation circuit 316 uses the value thus acquired as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number value, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. Use.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is input from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 13
8 sensors, stop button 139 sensors, checkout button 134 sensors, medal payout device 18
Medal payout sensor for medals paid out from 0, optical sensor for reel 110, reel 1
The state of the optical sensor of 11 (the optical sensor of the reel 112, the open / close sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. Stop button 137 sensor,
The stop button 138 sensor and the stop button 139 are installed on the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

Bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132
The sensor is installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the RAM 30
The insertion operation when the medals electronically stored in 8 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game is detected. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do, it becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

As described above, the open / close sensor is a sensor capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front door (door body) 102. When the front door 102 is in the closed state, the open / close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a low level signal) indicating that the front door 102 is in the closed state to the CPU 304. On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state, the open / close sensor outputs a signal (for example, a high-level signal) indicating the open detection state to the CPU 304.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. The drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129 are game start lamp 121, storage number display. Device 125, game information display 126, payout number display device 127
) Is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal plate 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and an external hall computer (not shown) or the like is connected to the main control unit 300 via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is the first.
Although it is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 400, the first sub-control unit 4
From 00, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. 1st sub-control unit 4
00 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface, and receives the control command.
A basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command is provided, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and RA for temporarily storing data.
It is equipped with an M408, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 is
It operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. Sound source IC418 is CP
The sound output from the amplifier and the speaker 272 and 277 is controlled in response to the command from the U404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier to be amplified by the speaker 27.
Output from 2,277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 14) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface.
4. Title panel 162 lamps, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 is a shutter sensor 4 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface.
28 and the effect button sensor 430 that can detect the pressing operation of the effect button 156 are connected. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 is an effect device 160 including display control of the liquid crystal display device 157.
Perform various controls. The second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various staging drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices.
And a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the staging image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (a). In the figure, each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112)
It is a figure which developed and showed the arrangement of the design applied to in a plane.

Each reel 110 to 112 has a plurality of types (8 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure.
The symbols of are arranged by a predetermined number of frames (21 frames of numbers 0 to 20 in this embodiment).
Further, the numbers 0 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the number 1 frame on the left reel 110 has a "replay" symbol, the number 0 frame on the middle reel 111 has a "bell" symbol, and the number 2 frame on the right reel 112 has a "replay" symbol. "Watermelon" symbols are arranged respectively.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 4 (b).
The figure shows the types of winning combinations (including operating combinations), the symbol combinations corresponding to each winning combination, and the operation or payout of each winning combination.

Of the winning roles in this embodiment, the big bonus (BB1, BB2) and the regular bonus (RB) are the roles to shift to the bonus game, and the replay is the replay without inserting a new medal. There are cases where the winning combination is distinguished from the winning combination and is called the "operating combination", but the "winning combination" in the present embodiment includes the operating role, a big bonus, a regular bonus, and a replay. included. In addition, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operator without the distribution of medals (without the payout of medals) is displayed on the valid line, for example, big bonus, regular. Includes bonuses and winning replays.

The winning roles of the slot machine 100 include big bonuses (BB1, BB2), regular bonuses (RB), small roles (cherries, watermelons, bells), and replays. It goes without saying that the types of winning combinations are not limited to this, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

"Big Bonus (BB1, BB2)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "BB")
Is a special role (actuating role) in which a big bonus game (BB game), which is a special game, is started by winning a prize. The corresponding symbol combinations are "white 7-white 7-white 7" for BB1 and "blue 7" for BB2.
-Blue 7-Blue 7 ". In addition, the flags of BB1 and BB2 are carried over. That is, when BB1 and BB2 are internally elected, a flag indicating this is set (RAM of the main control unit 300).
(Stored in the predetermined area of 308), even if BB1 and BB2 are not won in the game, the flag indicating the internal winning is maintained until the winning, and BB1 and BB2 are maintained even after the next game. The internal winning is in progress, and the symbol combination "White 7-White 7-White 7" corresponding to BB1 and the symbol combination "Blue 7-Blue 7-Blue 7" corresponding to BB2 are all in a state of winning a prize.

"Regular Bonus (RB)" is a regular bonus game (RB game) by winning a prize.
Is a special role (acting role) that is started. The corresponding symbol combination is "Bonus-Bonus-"
"Bonus". As for RB, the flag is carried over in the same manner as the above-mentioned BB. However, in the big bonus game (BB game) (details will be described later), the start condition is not that the regular bonus game (RB game) is internally won and that the symbol combination is displayed on the winning line. In addition, the regular bonus game is started after the start of the big bonus game, and when one regular bonus game is completed, the next regular bonus game is automatically started. May be.

"Small role (cherry, watermelon, bell)" (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "cherry", "watermelon", "bell") is a winning role in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out by winning. The design combination is "cherry-ANY-ANY" for cherry, "watermelon-watermelon-watermelon" for watermelon, and "bell-bell-bell" for bell. The corresponding payout number is as shown in the figure. In the case of "Cherry-ANY-ANY", the design of the left reel 110 is "
Any symbol may be used as long as it is "cherry", and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

The "replay" is a winning role (operating role) that allows a game to be played without inserting a medal (game medium) in the next game by winning a prize, and the medal is not paid out. The corresponding symbol combination is "replay-replay-replay".

<Types of RT-type game states>
Next, the types and transitions of the RT-type gaming states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a default RT-type game state (hereinafter, also referred to as “normal game state”) that is initially set immediately after the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on.
This is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player compared to other gaming states.

In this example, in this replay low probability state (RT1), the replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1)
Or, if you win the replay role 3 (promotion replay 2), the replay high probability state (R) described later
Move to T2). Further, in this re-game low probability state (RT1), when the special role is internally won, the state shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Replay high probability state (RT2)>
The re-game high probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is higher than that of the re-game low probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this replay high probability state (RT2), when the special role is internally won,
It shifts to the special role internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Special role internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing to become a special role corresponding to this flag. It is a gaming state in which the corresponding symbol combination can be displayed.

In this example, in this special role internal winning state (RT3), when a special role is won, the game shifts to the special gaming state (RT4) described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state among all the gaming states.
In this example, in the special gaming state (RT4), when a predetermined number (for example, 200) is paid out, the game shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1).

In this example, the end condition of the special gaming state (RT4) is not particularly limited, and for example, when a predetermined combination is internally won, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) is won, or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) is won. It may be the case that the game is played a number of times (for example, 6 times).

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 has a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on.
A start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 for outputting the above is provided. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Details will be described later, but in this initial setting process, processing related to initial setting, setting change, return processing, and the like is performed.

In step S102, the medal insertion / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for transmitting an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, if you win a prize in the re-game role in the previous game,
Since the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed and the replay state is set, the player does not need to insert medals. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line confirmation process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed, and in the next step S105, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is obtained. Preparations are made for transmitting the indicated internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, a reel stop data selection process for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S106, the first sub-control unit 400 issues a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data.
Get ready to send to. In step S107, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S108, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop data stop table is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to the reel 110 ~ according to the number of lead-in frames set in the stop table.
Stop any of 112. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109.

In this step S108, the stop button reception command for the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception command).
Stop button reception 1 command, for the second stop operation, stop button reception 2 command, 3rd
For the stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel stop command regarding the reel stop position (for details, the first one). For the stop reel, the reel stop 1 command, and for the second stop operation,
For the reel stop 2 command and the third stop operation, the reel stop 3 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning judgment process,
When a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "Bell-Bell-Bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won a small role (Bell). Further, in this step S109, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, the game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied, the process is performed.
Transition the game state. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the game state of the current RT system.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Initial setting process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 6, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 5 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

In step S201, the initial setting at startup is performed. In this initial setting at startup, the CPU 30
Setting the initial stack value (temporary setting) to the stack pointer (SP) of 4, interrupt prohibition setting,
Initial setting of I / O 310, initial setting of various variables stored in RAM 308, operation permission to WDT314, setting of initial value, etc. are performed.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308, and if there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to execute the initialization process, and if there is no abnormality, step S20.
Proceed to 3.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state (door is being opened).
If the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204, and if the door is not open, step S205 is performed.
Proceed to to execute the return process. Further, in step S204, whether the setting key SW is ON or OF
It is determined whether it is F, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the setting change process, and it is OFF.
In the case of, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the return process.

In the return process of step S205, the process of returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power failure (for example, in the power cut process of step S411 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, RA
After executing the restoration of the restoration data saved in M308, etc.), the initial setting processing is terminated.

In step S206, after performing the setting change process, the process proceeds to step S207. Details will be described later, but in this setting change process, processing related to the setting change and the like are performed.

In step S207, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, after executing a process (RAM clear) for initializing the data of the RAM 308, the initial setting process is terminated.

<Setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 6 will be described with reference to FIG. 7. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process.

In step S301, a process of initializing the data of RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and in the next step S302, preparations for transmitting a setting change start command indicating to start setting change to the first sub-control unit 400. I do. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of starting the display of the management screen.

In step S303, the interrupt status is set during the setting change. As a result, in the various game processes in step S404 of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, the process corresponding to the setting change is executed.

In step S304, the current set value is displayed using the set value display device 101a. For example, if the current set value is the setting 6, the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed. Step S30
In 5, it is determined whether or not the reset SW has been operated, and if there is an operation, the current set value is changed, and if there is no operation, until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted in step S307. The process of step S305 is repeatedly executed.

More specifically, in the processes of steps S305 to S307, every time the operation of the reset SW is detected, the set value is incremented and updated by 1 with respect to the currently set values 1 to 6, and the set value is 6.
If it exceeds, the set value is changed by repeatedly executing the return to 1. If it is determined in step S307 that the start lever 135 has been operated, the operation of changing the set value by the reset SW is terminated, and the process proceeds to step S308.

In step S308, the set value displayed on the set value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new set value (the set value is confirmed), and in the next step S309, the display of the set value display device 101a is erased. And hide the setting value.

In this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, but the front door 10 is added with the process of determining whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state.
The set value may be fixed only when 2 is in the open state. In this case, when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the set value cannot be determined, but the display of the management screen may be continued.

In step S310, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON, and if it is ON, the process of step S310 is repeatedly executed. If it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S311 in order to end the setting change. In step S311, preparations are made for transmitting a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is ended to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, C
Processing such as temporarily saving the value of each register of PU304 to the stack area is performed. In step S402, the count value of WDT314 is the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment).
WDT3 so that WDT interruption does not occur beyond () (to prevent processing abnormality from being detected).
14 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit).

In step S403, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area. In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S405, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S406, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S407, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Details will be described later, but in this device monitoring process, setting value confirmation processing, door opening monitoring processing, settlement processing, and the like are performed.

In step S409, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S411, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, a process of setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each of the original registers is performed, and the process returns to the main control unit main process. On the other hand, in step S411, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. Then, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 9, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main control unit timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 8 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing.

In step S501, the process proceeds to step S502 after performing the set value confirmation process. Details will be described later, but in this setting value confirmation process, processing related to setting confirmation is performed. Step S502
Then, the door opening monitoring process is performed.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open / close sensor in the door opening monitoring process, and when it detects a signal indicating that the front door 102 is in the closing detection state, the main control unit 300 sends the closing detection information indicating that the front door 102 is closed to the RAM 308. While storing, preparations are made for transmitting a door closing detection command indicating that the closing of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. First sub-control unit 40
0 indicates the closing detection information indicating that the closing of the front door 102 is detected when the door closing detection command is received from the main control unit 300 (in this example, the information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closing).
Is stored in RAM 408 as history information in chronological order.

On the other hand, in the door opening monitoring process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open / close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating that the opening detection state is present, the main control unit 300 outputs the opening detection information indicating that the opening of the front door 102 is detected. In addition to storing in the RAM 308, preparations are made for transmitting a door opening detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub control unit 400 receives this door open detection command from the main control unit 300, the front door 10
The opening detection information (in this example, the information indicating "opening" and the opening date and time) indicating that the opening of 2 is detected is stored in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order, and the door opening notification is performed.

The door opening notification will be described later, but in this example, when the front door 102 is in the door open state, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emitting mode, and the sound output means (speaker 2) is emitted.
72,277) outputs an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is opening"). note that,
The mode of the door opening notification is not particularly limited, and for example, the character string "door is being opened" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In step S503, after performing the settlement process, the process proceeds to step S504. In this settlement process, the main control unit 300 receives the settlement button 1 during the valid period of the settlement button 134 (for example, the period from when the game can be started until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted).
34 When the state of the sensor is monitored and a signal indicating that the checkout button 134 has been operated is detected, it indicates that the process of settling the electronically stored medals and the process of settling the medals have been executed. Preparations are made for transmitting the settlement command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S504, the device monitoring process is terminated after performing other device monitoring processing. Details will be described later, but in other device monitoring processes, error notification start processing, error notification end processing, and the like are performed.

<Set value confirmation process>
Next, the set value confirmation process (step S501) in the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 9 will be described with reference to FIG. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the set value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the set value is being confirmed, and if the set value is being confirmed, the process proceeds to step S606, and if the set value is not being confirmed, the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the set value confirmation valid period is in effect, the process proceeds to step S603 in the case of the set value confirmation valid period, and the set value confirmation process ends in the case of not the set value confirmation valid period.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not a MAX bet state (a state in which one game can be started (three in this example) of medals is bet, or a replay state in which a game is replayed), but an opening / closing state. This is the period during which the sensor is not in the closed detection state and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating and the error is not being notified.

The conditions relating to the set value confirmation valid period are not all of the above conditions, but may be any of the above conditions or any of a plurality of the above conditions.

In step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF, it is determined.
The setting value confirmation process is completed, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S604. Step S604
Then, the current set value is displayed using the set value display device 101a. For example, if the current set value is the setting 6, the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made for transmitting a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation is started to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of starting the display of the management screen.

In step S606 during setting confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the setting value confirmation process is terminated in order to continue the setting confirmation. If it is OFF, step S607 is performed. move on. In step S607, the display of the setting value display device 101a is erased, the setting value is hidden, and in the next step S608, a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is terminated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Get ready for. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the setting confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, with reference to FIG. 11, another device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 9 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of other device monitoring processes.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not each error is detected, if it is not in each error detection state, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and if it is in each error detection state, the process proceeds to step S702.

Here, as an error that may occur in the slot machine 100 according to the present embodiment,
Door open error (door open error), hopper empty error, medal insertion error 1 (
Medal selector error), medal insertion abnormality 2-4, medal payout abnormality 1-3, overflow abnormality, RAM failure, winning abnormality, etc.

The door open error (door open error) is an error that notifies the opening of the door of the game console, occurs when the front door 102 is opened (error is detected), and is resolved when the front door 102 is closed. (The error is not detected).

As described above, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open / close sensor in the door opening monitoring process, and when it detects a signal indicating that it is in the closing detection state, it transmits a door closing detection command to the first sub control unit 400. However, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the closure detection information (in this example, the information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closure) in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order, while being in the open detection state. When the signal indicating "opening" is detected, a door opening detection command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the opening detection information (in this example, the information indicating "opening" and the opening date and time). Is stored in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order, and the door opening notification is performed.

The hopper empty error is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 is less than or equal to the specified number (error detection state), and the specified number of medals. It will be resolved by replenishing the above medals to the hopper (error will not be detected).

Medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) occurs when the inserted medal stays in the medal selector, etc. (error detection state), and after removing the cause of the error, the error release switch (reset SW in this example). ) Is resolved when the operation is accepted (error is not detected). The medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of medals inserted is equal to or greater than the specified number (error detection state), and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM (error non-detection state).

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on (in an error detection state) other than during the medal insertion process, and the medal insertion abnormality 4 is the insertion of the inserted medal. Occurs when the sensor 1 and the input sensor 2 are not passed normally (
After removing the cause of the error, the error is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted (error is not detected).

The medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when the medal payout device is not driven for a certain period of time (an error is detected), and the medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when the medal stays when the medal payout device is driven. However, the medal payout abnormality 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal payout process (becomes an error detection state).
(Error detected state), both of which are resolved when the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted after removing the cause of the error (error not detected state).
..

The overflow abnormality occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on (error detection state), and after removing the cause of the error, the error release switch (error release switch)
In this example, it is resolved when the operation of reset SW) is accepted (error is not detected). The RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (error detection state), and is resolved when the operation of the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is accepted (error non-detection state). Become). The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol confirmed by the internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (error detection state is reached), and the error release switch (reset SW in this example) is operated. It will be resolved when it is accepted (error will not be detected).

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to slot machines, and can also be applied to pachinko machines. Errors that can occur in the pachinko machine include, for example, a bottom pan full tank error, a payout device error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic error, a magnetic field error, a frame opening error, and a RAM clear error. , Impact sensor error, etc., and these errors are also resolved when the operation of the error release switch is accepted after the cause of the error is removed.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not the error notification is possible period, and if it is not the error notification possible period, the process proceeds to other device monitoring processing, and if it is the error notification possible period, the process proceeds to step S703.

Here, the error notification possible period is a period during which the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not each error is being notified, and if each error is not being notified, the process proceeds to step S704, and if each error is being notified, the process proceeds to step S705. In step S704, the error notification start process is executed.

In this error notification start processing, the main control unit 300 displays an error code on the payout number display 127, and issues an error command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub control unit 400.
Get ready to send to. The first sub-control unit 400 issues this error command to the main control unit 3.
When it is received from 00, the process of starting error notification is executed.

Error notification will be described later, but in this example, if a selector error occurs,
In the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), a character string "Selector error has occurred !!" and a character string "Please call a game clerk." Are displayed, and a light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) is displayed. Is emitted in an error light emission mode, and an error sound (a sound such as "An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk") is output from the sound output means (speakers 272,277). The mode of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, a movable means (reel 110).
The error notification may be performed by the movement of ~ 112).

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state (door is being opened).
If the door is open, the other device monitoring process is terminated, and if the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S706. In step S706, it is determined whether or not the error notification end condition is satisfied, and if the error notification end condition is not satisfied, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and if the error notification end condition is satisfied, the other device monitoring process is terminated. , Step S707.

Here, the error notification end condition is a condition that is satisfied when an operation for canceling an error (in this example, an operation for turning on the reset SW) is accepted in the error non-detection state.

In step S707, the error notification end process is executed. In this error notification end process, the main control unit 300 erases the error code displayed on the payout number display 127, and also sends an error resolution command corresponding to the resolved error to the first sub-control unit 400. Prepare for. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this error resolution command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of terminating the error notification being executed.

In step S708, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and if it is OFF, it is determined.
In order to continue displaying the management screen, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and if it is ON,
The process proceeds to step S709. In step S709, the main control unit 300 transmits a preparation screen display command instructing the start of display of the preparation screen (for example, see FIGS. 16A and 16A) to the first sub-control unit 400. Get ready. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the preparation screen display command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 can display the preparation screen or display the management screen until the management screen can be displayed. Even so, the process of displaying the preparation screen is executed for a predetermined time.

<Management screen>
Next, the management screen will be described with reference to FIGS. 12 to 18.

Here, the management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a clerk of a game store to make various settings related to the slot machine 100. The display content of the administrator screen is not particularly limited, but in this example, the administrator screen SD shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A can be displayed.

The administrator screen SD of this example is composed of a title display of "system setting" indicating that the screen is for an administrator and a plurality of types of menu displays. The menu display of this example includes power saving settings, time settings, error history settings, and setting histories.
Cross key 193a (up key, down key, right key, left key) and OK button 1 explained using
By operating 93b, any item of the menu display can be arbitrarily selected.

For example, when the power saving setting item is selected on the administrator screen SD, it is possible to set the power saving mode (for example, simple setting such as volume setting of speakers 272 and 277 and brightness of LEDs and various lamps). When the time setting item is selected, the date and time can be set.

Further, when the error history item is selected on the administrator screen SD, the history of errors that have occurred in the past on the game console, the history of opening and closing the front door 102, the history of power-on / power-off / recovery, etc. It is possible to display the history of past setting changes and setting confirmation when the setting history item is selected. The front door 102 in the error history
The open-closed history and the setting history will be described later.

The items that can be selected on the administrator screen SD are not limited to this example, and for example, the maximum volume that can be set only by the administrator of the game store or when an error (for example, opening the front door 102) occurs. It may be possible to set an error sound or the like to be output, or it may be possible to set the amount of light of an LED or various lamps.

Next, prior to the description of the management screen SD, the terms and phrases used in the following drawings will be described with reference to FIG. 12A.

"Power status" indicates the status of the power supplied to the slot machine 100 from the outside.
"Power off" is a state in which power is not supplied to the slot machine 100, and "power ON" is a state in which power is supplied to the slot machine 100.

The "reel operating state" indicates the operating state of the reels 110 to 112, the "stopped" is the state in which all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, and the "operating" is the reels 110 to 11
At least one of 2 is in a rotating state, which is synonymous with "rotating".

The "door body closed state / door body open state" indicates the state of the front door 102, the "door body closed state" is the state in which the front door 102 is closed, and the "door body open state" is the front surface. The door 102 is open. Further, the "closed detection state / open detection state" indicates the state of the open / close sensor, and the "closed detection state" is a state in which it is detected that the front door 102 is in the closed state, or the front door 102 is open. It is a state in which the detection state of the open / close sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state by a predetermined operation, and the "openness detection state" is a state in which it is detected that the front door 102 is in the open state. Is.

"Non-inserted state / inserted state" indicates whether or not a medal has been inserted, and "non-inserted state"
Is a state in which no medals have been inserted, and "inserted state" is a state in which medals have been inserted or a replay state due to a replay prize. Further, the "error detection state" indicates whether or not an error has been detected, the "error non-detection state" is a state in which no error has been detected, and the "error detection state" has detected a certain error. It is in a state of being.

"Setting key SW" indicates the state of the setting key SW, "ON" is the state in which the setting key SW is ON, and "OFF" is the state in which the setting key SW is OFF. "Reset SW" is
Indicates the reset SW state, "ON" means that the reset SW is ON, and "OFF".
Is a state in which the reset SW is OFF.

"Start lever" indicates the state of the start lever 135, "ON" is the state in which the start lever 135 is ON, and "OFF" is the state in which the start lever 135 is OFF. The "stop button" indicates the state of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and is "non-operation".
Is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not operated, and "stop operation" is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated. The "cross button" indicates the state of the cross button 193, the "non-operation" is the state in which the cross button 193 is not operated, and the "specific operation" is the state in which the cross button 193 is operated.

The "light emitting body" indicates the operating state of the light emitting means (in this example, various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, etc.)), and "off" indicates the operating state.
The light emitting means is turned off, and the "open light emitting mode" is a state in which the light emitting means is emitting light in the open light emitting mode indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state, and the "stopping light emitting mode". Is a state in which the light emitting means is emitting light in a stopped light emitting mode indicating that the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

The “output sound” indicates the operating state of the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277 in this example).
"Non-output" is a state in which no sound is output from the sound output means, and "setting change sound" is a state in which a setting change sound indicating that the setting is being changed is output from the sound output means. Yes, "open sound" is a state in which an open sound indicating that the front door 102 is in the open state is output from the sound output means, and "stopping BGM" is a state in which the reel 110 to the reel 110 are output from the sound output means. It is a state in which a stopped BGM indicating that 112 is stopped is being output. Further, the "display example" shows an example of the display contents displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Setting change mode>
Next, the setting change mode will be described with reference to FIG. 12 (A). FIG. 12A is a diagram showing the flow of the setting change mode in chronological order.

<Set change mode / Turn on the setting key SW when the power is turned off>
In the states shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A, the setting key SW is turned off by the manager of the game store when the power supply state is the power off state, the front door 102 is the door body open state, and the open / close sensor is the open detection state.
The operation (certain operation) to turn on is performed, and the setting key SW is turned on.

In the same state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) is turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is non-output, and the display means (display means (various lamps 420, etc.)).
The liquid crystal display device 157) is non-display.

<Start setting change mode / setting change mode, display management screen>
The state shown in FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (2) is the setting key SW described with reference to FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (1).
Is ON, the operation by the power switch is performed by the manager of the game store, and the power state is changed from the power OFF to the power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on while the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed. In the same state, the state shifts to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode), and the setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277).

Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A, the front door 102 is open, so that the front door 102 is open.
The light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emitting mode.

Further, the slot machine 100 is an operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (a certain operation) when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state. Is configured so that the display of the management screen (management display) can be started.

More specifically, the main control unit 300 has the initial setting process step S described with reference to FIG.
In 203 to S204, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the setting key SW is determined to be ON, the setting change process described with reference to FIG. 7 is started. In this example, the front door 102 is started.
Is in the open state and the setting key SW is ON, so that the setting change process is started.

Subsequently, in step S302 of this setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating that the setting change is started to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 performs this. When the setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, the process of starting the display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A, the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 displays the current set value using the set value display device 101a in step S304 of the setting change process, but in this example, since the current set value is the setting 6, As shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A, the setting 6 is set in the setting value display device 101a.
The number 6 indicating is displayed.

<Setting change mode / Change setting value>
The state shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A is a state in which the operation by the reset SW is performed once by the manager of the game store in the setting change mode.

The main control unit 300 resets S in steps S305 to S307 of the setting change process.
Each time the operation of W is detected, it is added and updated by 1 for the currently set values 1 to 6, and when the set value exceeds 6, it is repeatedly returned to 1 to set. Although the value is changed, in this example, since the operation of the reset SW is detected once, the number 1 indicating the setting 1 is set on the setting value display device 101a as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A. indicate.

<Setting change mode / Confirm setting value>
The states shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A are states in which the manager of the game store has operated the start lever 135 in the setting change mode.

The main control unit 300 has the start lever 135 in step S307 of the setting change process.
If it is determined that the operation has been performed, in the following steps S308 to S309, the set value displayed on the set value display device 101a is stored (confirmed) as a new set value, and the set value display device 101a is displayed. Is erased and the set value is hidden. However, in this example, since the operation of the start lever 135 is detected, the display of the set value display device 101a is erased as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A. do.

<End of setting change mode / setting change mode>
The state shown in FIGS. 12 (A) and 12 (5) is a state in which the manager of the game store performs an operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF in the setting change mode, and the setting key SW is turned OFF.

In step S310 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 turns off the setting key SW.
If it is determined that, the first setting change end command indicating that the setting change is ended is issued.
It is transmitted to the sub control unit 400, and when the first sub control unit 400 receives the setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12A and 12A, the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the reels 110 to 1 are usually produced.
The effect to be executed while the 12 is stopped is started.

<Setting confirmation mode>
Next, the setting confirmation mode will be described with reference to FIG. 12B. FIG. 12B is a diagram showing the flow of the setting confirmation mode in chronological order.

<Setting confirmation mode / Front door: Door closed state>
The states shown in FIGS. 12B and 12 (1) are a state in which the power is on, the front door 102 is in the door closed state, and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the stopped effect is being executed.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitter (various lamps 42).
0 etc.) is stopped and emits light in a light emitting mode, and is stopped from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277) B
The GM is output, and the stopped effect is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Setting confirmation mode / Front door: Door closed state → Door open state)>
In the state shown in FIGS. 12B and 12B, the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 is changed from the door body closed state to the door body in the door body closed state described with reference to FIGS. It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitter (various lamps 42).
0 etc.) is emitted in an open light emission mode, and the open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277), while the stopped effect is continued in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Setting confirmation mode / power ON, setting key SW ON in front door (door body open state)>
In the states shown in FIGS. 12B and 12B, the game store is managed when the power supply state shown in FIGS. 12B and 12B is the power ON state, the front door 102 is the door body open state, and the open / close sensor is the open detection state. An operation (certain operation) for turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed by a person, and the setting key SW is turned ON.

The slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is turned on.
Since it is configured to shift to a state where the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when the operation to be performed is performed, in the same state, the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Transition.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the setting key SW is turned off.
When an operation (certain operation) to turn on from is performed, the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started.

More specifically, in the set value confirmation process steps S602 to S603 described with reference to FIG. 10, the main control unit 300 has a set value confirmation valid period (in this example, a MAX bet state (one game can be started). The open / close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110 ~
When any one of 112 is not rotating and is not in error notification) and the setting key SW is determined to be ON, in the subsequent step S604, the setting value display device 101
The current set value is displayed using a.

In this example, since the setting value confirmation valid period, the setting key SW is ON, and the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. do.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation is started to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 performs this. When the setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, the process of starting the display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12B and 12B, the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<End of setting confirmation mode / setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIGS. 12 (B) and 12 (4) is a state in which the administrator of the game store performs an operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF in the setting confirmation mode, and the setting key SW is turned OFF.

In the main control unit 300, the setting key SW is OF in step S606 of the set value confirmation process.
If it is determined to be F, a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is terminated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends this setting confirmation end command to the main control unit. When it is received from 300, the process of ending the display of the management screen is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 12B and 12B, the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the reels 110 to 1 are usually produced.
The effect to be executed while the 12 is stopped is started.

<Display example of management screen 1>
Next, a display example 1 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (A). FIG. 13 (A)
Is a diagram showing the flow of display example 1 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 13 (A) (1) to (A) (3) are shown in FIGS. 12 (B) (1) to (B).
) In the same state as the setting confirmation mode described using (3), the power state is the power ON, the front door 102 is the door open state, and the open / close sensor is the open detection state. Is performed from OFF to ON (a certain operation), and the display of the management screen SD is started.

In order to avoid duplicate explanations, a detailed description of the same state will be omitted, but FIG. 13 (
A) In the states shown in (1) to (A) and (2) of the same figure, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the stopped effect is executed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). In addition to (or instead of), an open notification (for example, an image containing the character string "door is open") indicating that the door is open may be displayed (other implementations). The same applies to the example).

<Display example of management screen 1 / Open / close sensor: Open detection state → Closed detection state>
The state shown in FIGS. 13A and 13A is a state in which the detection state of the open / close sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state by a predetermined operation in the setting confirmation mode.

The slot machine 100 is for management even when the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the state where the management screen SD (management display) is displayed. It is configured to continue displaying the screen SD (management display).

More specifically, in the set value confirmation process steps S601 and S606 described with reference to FIG. 10, the main control unit 300 is checking the set value and the setting key SW is ON.
The setting value confirmation process is terminated and the setting confirmation mode is continued. However, in this example, since the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON, as shown in FIGS. 13 (A) and 13 (4), Management screen S
Continue to display D.

Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 13 (A) and 13 (4), the front door 102 is open, but since the detection state of the open / close sensor is the closed detection state, the light emitting body (various types) that emitted light in the open mode. Sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that turned off the lamp 420, etc. and output the open sound.
Set the output sound of to non-output.

<Display example of management screen 1 / Exit of setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIGS. 13 (A) and 13 (5) is a state in which the manager of the game store performs an operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF in the setting confirmation mode, and the setting key SW is turned OFF.

When the main control unit 300 determines in step S606 of the setting value confirmation process described with reference to FIG. 10 that the setting key SW is OFF, the main control unit 300 issues a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is terminated. 1 The sub-control unit 400 is transmitted, and the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the display of the management screen when the setting confirmation end command is received from the main control unit 300.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13 (A) and 13 (5), the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the reels 110 to 1 are usually produced.
The effect to be executed while the 12 is stopped is started.

<Display example of management screen 1 / Turn on the setting key SW with the open / close sensor (closed detection state)>
The states shown in FIGS. 13A and 13A are operations in which the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON by the manager of the game store when the front door 102 is in the door open state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state (a certain operation). ) Is performed and the setting key SW is turned on.

The slot machine 100 is an operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the closed detection state.
Even if a certain operation) is performed, the display of the management screen SD (management display) cannot be started.

More specifically, in the set value confirmation process steps S602 to S603 described with reference to FIG. 10, the main control unit 300 has a set value confirmation valid period (in this example, a MAX bet state (one game can be started). The open / close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110 ~
When any one of 112 is not rotating and is not in error notification) and the setting key SW is determined to be ON, in the subsequent step S604, the setting value display device 101
The current set value is displayed using a.

In this example, since the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state and the set value confirmation is not valid, the set value confirmation process is terminated and the subsequent process of step S604 is not executed. Therefore, the set value is set in the set value display device 101a. Is not displayed. Further, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the first sub-control unit 4 issues a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation is started.
Since it is not transmitted to 00, as shown in FIGS. 13 (A) and 13 (6), the display means (liquid crystal display device 15).
In the display area of 7), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the stopped effect is continued.

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1).
00, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) provided on the front surface of the game table, and the above. A detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body (for example, the open / close sensor shown in FIG. 1) and a first operation means (for example, an operation of turning from OFF to ON by rotating the door body). , Setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and the plurality of reels are provided corresponding to each of the above-mentioned. A plurality of stop buttons for individually stopping the rotation of the reel (for example, stop buttons 137 to
139) and the game table provided, the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is the door. When the body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the open detection state, and a predetermined operation related to the detection means (for example, between the light emitting unit and the light receiving unit of the open / close sensor of the main body 101). By performing the operation (operation of inserting a light-shielding piece of a certain length and fixing it with tape or the like), the detection state of the detection means becomes the closed detection state even when the door body is in the open state. It is composed and
The display means is a means capable of displaying a management display for an administrator, and the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the open detection state (hereinafter, "first state"). That is.
), When the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display can be started, and in the first state, the reel is rotating, the certain operation is performed. Even if it is performed, it is configured not to start the display of the management display, and in the first state, the state where the reel is rotating, and the state where the certain operation is performed, the said When the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)), the display of the management display is started. When the door body is in the open state and the detection state of the detection means is the closed detection state, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display cannot be started.
Even when the detection state of the detection means changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the state where the management display is displayed, the display of the management display (for example, FIG. 1).
3 (A) The game console is characterized in that the management screen SD shown in (4) is continued.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during the game (for example, while the reel is rotating or the medal is bet), a fraudulent act is performed. Therefore, it is possible that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even when the door is open, so that security can be improved. Further, for example, even if the fraudster performs a predetermined operation and opens the door body while the detection state of the detection means is in the closed detection state, the management display cannot be confirmed, thereby improving the security. Can be planned. In addition, after the management display is displayed, even if the door open sensor is in the closed detection state, by continuing to display the management display, it is possible to provide a game table that is easy for the game clerk to use. It will be possible.

In the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in a second stop mode (for example, a replay combination). It may be configured so that the display of the management display is not started when the symbol combination corresponding to (replay) is stopped.

With such a configuration, even if the reel is in the stopped state, if it is stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it is in the max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display is displayed. It is possible to improve security by preventing the display of.

Further, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, since only the manager of the game store can perform the operation by the first operation means, it is possible to surely prevent fraudulent acts and the like.

<Display example 2 of management screen>
Next, a display example 2 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. 13 (B). FIG. 13 (B)
Is a diagram showing the flow of display example 2 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 13 (B) (1) to (B) (3) are shown in FIGS. 12 (B) (1) to (B).
) In the same state as the setting confirmation mode described using (3), the power state is the power ON, the front door 102 is the door open state, and the open / close sensor is the open detection state. Is performed from OFF to ON (a certain operation), and the display of the management screen SD is started. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, detailed description of the same state will be omitted.

<Display example 2 of management screen / Power status: Power ON → Power OFF>
In the state shown in FIGS. 13 (B) and 13 (4), when the power state shown in FIGS. 13 (B) and (3) is on, the manager of the game store operates the power switch and the power state is the power supply. It is a state in which the power is changed from ON to OFF.

In the same state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) is turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is non-output, and the display means (display means (various lamps 420, etc.)).
The liquid crystal display device 157) is non-display.

<Display example 2 of management screen / Setting key SW: ON → OFF>
The states shown in FIGS. 13 (B) and 13 (5) are shown in FIGS. 13 (B) and (4).
When the setting key SW is ON, the administrator of the game store turns the setting key SW from ON to O.
The operation to set to FF is performed, and the setting key SW is turned off.

In the same state, since the power supply state is OFF, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is non-output, and the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is not output. ) Is hidden.

<Display example 2 of management screen / Power status: Power OFF → Power ON>
In the state shown in FIGS. 13 (B) and 13 (6), when the power supply state shown in FIGS. OF
It is a state in which the power is changed from F to ON.

In the state where the management screen SD (management display) is displayed, the slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from ON to OFF (cancels a certain operation) after turning off the power.
When the power is turned on, the display of the management display is started without performing the certain operation.

More specifically, in the main control unit 300, the state before the power failure in step S205 of the main control unit initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 6 is after the setting confirmation start command is transmitted, and the setting confirmation is completed. When the command is not transmitted, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF, and when it is OFF, a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation is started is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. do.

When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of starting the display of the management screen. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 13B and 13B, the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1).
00, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) provided on the front surface of the game table, and the above. A detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body (for example, the open / close sensor shown in FIG. 1) and a first operation means (for example, an operation of turning from OFF to ON by rotating the door body). , Setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and the plurality of reels are provided corresponding to each of the above-mentioned. A plurality of stop buttons for individually stopping the rotation of the reel (for example, stop buttons 137 to
139) and the game table provided, the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is the door. When the body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying the management display for the administrator, and the detection state of the detection means. Is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), and is the first state. In the state where the reel is rotating, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display is not started, and the first state, the reel is rotating. When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button in a state and a state in which the certain operation is being performed, the above-mentioned It is configured to start the display of the management display, and the management display (for example, FIGS. 13B) (3).
) Is displayed, when the power is turned off, the certain operation is canceled, and the power is turned on, the management display (the management display ()) is displayed without performing the certain operation. For example, it is a game table characterized in that the display of the management screen SD) shown in FIGS. 13 (B) and 13 (6) is started.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during the game (for example, while the reel is rotating or the medal is bet), a fraudulent act is performed. Therefore, it is possible that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even when the door is open, so that security can be improved. Further, if the management display is not properly terminated, even if the power is turned on, the management display is displayed, so that it is possible to provide a game table that is easy for the game clerk to use.

In the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in a second stop mode (for example, a replay combination). It may be configured so that the display of the management display is not started when the symbol combination corresponding to (replay) is stopped.

With such a configuration, even if the reel is in the stopped state, if it is stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it is in the max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display is displayed. It is possible to improve security by preventing the display of.

Further, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, since only the manager of the game store can perform the operation by the first operation means, it is possible to surely prevent fraudulent acts and the like.

<Display example 3 of management screen>
Next, a display example 3 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (A). FIG. 14 (A)
Is a diagram showing the flow of display example 3 of the management screen in chronological order.

<Display example 3 of management screen / Reel operation status: In operation>
In the states shown in FIGS. 14A and 14A, the front door 102 is in the closed state, the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel operating state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotated). The state of being).

In the same state, since the reel operating state is operating, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.)
Lights up during the game, outputs the BGM during the game from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and displays the effect during the game in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Display example of management screen 3 / Front door: Door closed state → Door open state>
In the state shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (2), the front door 102 is opened and the front door 102 is changed from the closed state to the door body in the door body closed state described with reference to FIGS. It is in an open state.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitter (various lamps 42).
0 etc.) is emitted in an open light emission mode, and the open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), while the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 continues the effect during the game.

<Display example of management screen 3 / Turn on the setting key SW while the reel is rotating>
The state shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (3) means that the reel operating state shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (2) is in operation.
When the front door 102 is in the open state of the door and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, the manager of the game store performs an operation (certain operation) to turn the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting key SW is set to O.
It is in the state of becoming N.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. In, even if the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (a certain operation) is performed, the state does not shift to the state where the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), and the management screen (administration display) is displayed. It is configured not to start displaying.

More specifically, in the set value confirmation process steps S602 to S603 described with reference to FIG. 10, the main control unit 300 has a set value confirmation valid period (in this example, a MAX bet state (one game can be started). The open / close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110 ~
When any one of 112 is not rotating and is not in error notification) and the setting key SW is determined to be ON, in the subsequent step S604, the setting value display device 101
The current set value is displayed using a.

In this example, since any of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating and the set value confirmation valid period is not reached, the set value confirmation process is terminated and the subsequent process of step S604 is not executed. Therefore, the set value display device. The set value is not displayed in 101a. Further, step S60
Since the process 5 is not executed either, the setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation is started is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Therefore, as shown in FIGS. 14A and 14A, the display means (liquid crystal display). In the display area of the display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the display is not started.
The production continues during the game.

<Display example 3 of management screen / Reel operation status: Operating → Stopping>
The state shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (4) means that the reel operating state shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (3) is in operation.
The third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game store while the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, since the small winning combination (bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed, the illustration is omitted, but the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination (bell) is shown in the symbol display window 113. The combination (in this example, the symbol combination of "bell-bell-bell") is displayed, and FIG. 14 (A) is displayed.
) As shown in (4), in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), the winning notification display ND1 (in this example, the image of the bell pattern and the bell symbol) suggesting that the small winning combination (bell) has been won. G
ET! !! "Display of the character string) is displayed.

In the state shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (4), since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitting body (various lamps 420 and the like) emits light in an open light emitting mode, and the sound output means (speaker 272).
, 277), but the present invention is not limited to this, and the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a winning notification mode suggesting that the winning combination has been won, and the sound is output. means(
The speaker 272,277) may output a winning notification sound suggesting that the winning combination has been won (the same applies to the other embodiments).

<Display example of management screen 3 / Display of management screen>
The state shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (5) is a state in which the display of the management screen SD is started after the winning of the small winning combination (bell) described with reference to FIGS. 14 (A) and (4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the open / close sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the slot machine 100 is in a state where the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. When the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (a certain operation) is being performed, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) are used to press the multiple reels 110 to.
When the 112 is stopped in the first stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (bell)), the display of the management screen SD (management display) is started.
More specifically, in the set value confirmation process steps S602 to S603 described with reference to FIG. 10, the main control unit 300 has a set value confirmation valid period (in this example, a MAX bet state (one game can be started). The open / close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110 ~
When any one of 112 is not rotating and is not in error notification) and the setting key SW is determined to be ON, in the subsequent step S604, the setting value display device 101
The current set value is displayed using a.

In this example, since the set value confirmation valid period and the setting key SW are ON, the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current set value.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation is started to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 performs this. When the setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, the process of starting the display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1).
00, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) provided on the front surface of the game table, and the above. A detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body (for example, the open / close sensor shown in FIG. 1) and a first operation means (for example, an operation of turning from OFF to ON by rotating the door body). , Setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and the plurality of reels are provided corresponding to each of the above-mentioned. Multiple stop buttons for individually stopping the rotation of the reel (for example, stop buttons 137 to
139) and the game table provided, the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is the door. When the body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying the management display for the administrator, and the detection state of the detection means. Is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), and is the first state. In the state where the reel is rotating, even if the certain operation is performed, the display of the management display is not started, and the first state, the reel is rotating. When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button in a state and a state in which the certain operation is being performed, the above-mentioned It is a game table characterized in that it is configured to start the display of the management display (for example, the management screen SD shown in FIGS. 14 (A) and 14 (5)).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during the game (for example, while the reel is rotating or the medal is bet), a fraudulent act is performed. Therefore, it is possible that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even when the door is open, so that security can be improved.

The first operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, since only the manager of the game store can perform the operation by the first operation means, it is possible to surely prevent fraudulent acts and the like.

Further, the sound output means (for example, the speaker 272, 277 shown in FIG. 2) and the second operating means (for example, the cross-shaped button 193 shown in FIG. 1) are provided, and the operation by the second operating means is performed. It is configured so that the volume output from the sound output means can be changed when the sound output means is used, and the display means displays a volume value (when an operation by the second operation means is performed).
For example, it is a means capable of displaying the volume value display VD2) shown in FIGS. 18B and 18B, and while the management display is being displayed, the display means can display the volume value display. It may be configured so that the volume output from the sound output means cannot be changed even if the operation by the second operation means is performed (see, for example, FIGS. 18B and 3).

With such a configuration, it is possible to check the operation of the volume value display even while the management display is being displayed, and it is possible to improve the convenience of the manager of the game store.

Further, the second operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated regardless of whether the door body is in the open state or the closed state.

With such a configuration, not only the manager of the game store but also the player can adjust the volume, and the convenience of the player can be improved.

<Display example 4 of management screen>
Next, a display example 4 of the management screen will be described with reference to FIG. 14 (B). FIG. 14 (B)
Is a diagram showing the flow of display example 4 of the management screen in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 14 (B) (1) to (B) (3) are shown in FIGS. 14 (A) (1) to (A).
) In the same state as the setting confirmation mode described using (3), the power state is the power ON, the front door 102 is the door open state, and the open / close sensor is the open detection state. Was performed from OFF to ON (a certain operation), but reels 110 to 1
Since the twelve is rotating (the reel operating state is operating), the management screen SD is not displayed. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, detailed description of the same state will be omitted.

<Display example 4 of management screen / Reel operation status: Operating → Stopping>
The states shown in FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (4) indicate that the reel operating states shown in FIGS. 14 (B) and (3) are in operation.
The third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game store while the front door 102 is in the open state of the door body and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, the replay combination was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed. Therefore, although not shown, the replay combination is shown in the symbol display window 113.
The symbol combination corresponding to (in this example, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay") is displayed, the game shifts to the replay state by replay, and the display means is shown in FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (4). In the display area of (Liquid Crystal Display Device 157), the winning notification display ND2 (in this example, the image of the replay symbol and "GET!
!! "Display of the character string) is displayed.

<Display example of management screen 4 / Hide management screen>
The states shown in FIGS. 14 (B) and 14 (5) are the states after winning the replay of the replays described with reference to FIGS. 14 (A) and (4).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the open / close sensor (detection means) is in the open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and the slot machine 100 is in a state where the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. When the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (a certain operation) is being performed, the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) are used to press the multiple reels 110 to.
When 112 is stopped in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay), the display of the management screen SD (management display) is not started. ,
More specifically, in the set value confirmation process steps S602 to S603 described with reference to FIG. 10, the main control unit 300 has a set value confirmation valid period (in this example, a MAX bet state (one game can be started). The open / close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110 ~
When any one of 112 is not rotating and is not in error notification) and the setting key SW is determined to be ON, in the subsequent step S604, the setting value display device 101
The current set value is displayed using a.

In this example, since it is a replay state (MAX bet state) due to replay and it is not a set value confirmation valid period, the set value confirmation process is terminated and the subsequent process of step S604 is not executed. Therefore, the set value display device. The set value is not displayed in 101a. Further, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation is started is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Therefore, in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), FIG. As shown in 14 (B) and (5), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the effect during the game is continued.

According to this example, in the first state (the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor detection state is the open detection state), the reel is rotating, and a certain operation is being performed. , When a plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in the second stop mode (in this example, the symbol combination corresponding to the replay), the display of the management display is not started. Therefore, even if the reel is in the stopped state, if it is stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it is in the max bet state), it is judged that the game is in progress and the display of the management display cannot be started. By setting it to, the security can be improved.

<Error notification display example 1>
Next, display example 1 of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (A). FIG. 15 (A)
Is a diagram showing the flow of the error notification display example 1 in chronological order.

<Error notification display example 1 / Reel operating status: Operating (error not detected status)>
In the states shown in FIGS. 15A and 15A, the front door 102 is in the closed state, the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the reel operating state is in operation (at least one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotated). In the state of being), the error is not detected.

In the same state, since the reel operating state is operating, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.)
Lights up during the game, outputs the BGM during the game from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and displays the effect during the game in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Error notification display example 1 / Reel operating status: Operating (error detection status)>
In the state shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (2), the reel operating state shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and (1) is in operation (
In the state of (error not detected), an error has occurred and the error has been detected.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. In, even if a certain error (in this example, the medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error notification (error display) is not started.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 11, the following steps S702 to S702 to
In S703, the error notification possible period (in this example, the setting is not being changed, the reel 110
When it is determined that any of the steps to 112 is not during rotation) and each error notification is not being performed, the error notification start process is executed in the following step S704.

The states shown in FIGS. 15A and 15A are states in which the reel operating state is in operation (reels 110 to 1).
Since at least one of 12 is in a rotating state and is not in the error notification possible period, FIG. 15A (A) (FIG. 15A) without ending other device monitoring processing and starting error notification.
As shown in 2), the production during the game is continued.

<Error notification display example 3 / Reel operating status: operating → stopped>
In the state shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (3), the reel operating state shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and (2) is in operation (
In the error detection state), the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game store, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, since the small winning combination (bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed, the illustration is omitted, but the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination (bell) is shown in the symbol display window 113. While displaying the combination (in this example, the symbol combination of "bell-bell-bell"), FIG. 15 (A).
) (3), in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), the winning notification display ND1 (in this example, the image of the bell pattern and the bell design) suggesting that the small winning combination (bell) has been won. G
ET! !! "Display of the character string) is displayed.

In addition, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) was emitted in a bell light emitting mode suggesting that the player won the small role (bell), and the sound output means (speaker 272,277) won the small role (bell). It outputs a bell sound effect that suggests that.

<Error notification display example 1 / Error notification display>
The states shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (4) are states in which the error notification ER is started to be displayed after the small winning combination (bell) described with reference to FIGS. 15 (A) and (3) has won a prize.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state where a certain error (in this example, the medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are set to the first stop mode (this) by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button). In the example, it is configured to start displaying the error notification ER (error display) when it is stopped at the symbol combination corresponding to the small winning combination (bell).
More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 11, the following steps S702 to S702 to
In S703, the error notification possible period (in this example, the setting is not being changed, the reel 110
When it is determined that any of the steps to 112 is not during rotation) and each error notification is not being performed, the error notification is started in the subsequent step S704.

Since the state shown in FIGS. 15A and 15A is the error notification period, the main control unit 30
0 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start processing, the payout number display 1
An error code is displayed on 27, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends this error command to the main control unit 30.
When it is received from 0, the process of starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15A, an error notification ER (in this example, "selector error has occurred !!" is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). , "Please call the game clerk." Is displayed). In the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game clerk." ”) Is output.

The mode of error notification is not limited to this example, and for example, after executing the first error notification (for example, the display of the character string "Call a game clerk") in which the content of the error cannot be identified. , The error content may be notified step by step by executing a second error notification (for example, display of a character string "selector error has occurred !!") in which the error content can be identified. ..

Further, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15 (2'), the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, and the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state). Reel 110
When a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected while ~ 112 is rotating, a special error notification (error display) is started to be displayed. May be configured. Further, in this case, even if there is an operation by the reset SW (error cancellation operation) during the rotation of the reels 110 to 112, the error may not be canceled.

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1).
00, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) provided on the front surface of the game table, and the above. A detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body (for example, the open / close sensor shown in FIG. 1) and a first operation means (for example, an operation of turning from OFF to ON by rotating the door body). , Setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and the plurality of reels are provided corresponding to each of the above-mentioned. A plurality of stop buttons for individually stopping the rotation of the reel (for example, stop buttons 137 to
139) and the game table provided, the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is the door. When the body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying the management display for the administrator, and the detection state of the detection means. Is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), and is the first state. In the state where the reel is rotating, the display of the management display is not started even if the certain operation is performed, and the reel is rotating in the first state. When the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)) by the stop button in a state and a state in which the certain operation is being performed, the above-mentioned It is configured to start the display of the management display, and when a certain error (for example, medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected in the state where the reel is stopped, the certain error occurs. It is configured so that the display of the related error display can be started, and even if the certain error is detected in the state where the reel is rotating in the first state, the display of the error display is started. In the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the state in which the certain error is detected, the stop button causes the plurality of reels to stop in the first stop mode. When stopped at (for example, a symbol combination corresponding to a small winning combination (bell)), the display of the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIGS. 15A and 15) is configured to start. It is a game table characterized by being.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, if a certain operation is performed on the first operating means during the game (for example, while the reel is rotating or the medal is bet), a fraudulent act is performed. Therefore, it is possible that the management display is not displayed while the reel is rotating even when the door is open, so that security can be improved. In addition, even if an error occurs during the game (for example, while the reel is rotating or the medal is bet), the error notification is not started, and when the game is stopped, the error notification is started immediately to ensure security. It can be improved.

In the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the state in which the certain operation is being performed, the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in a second stop mode (for example, a replay combination). It may be configured so that the display of the management display is not started when the symbol combination corresponding to (replay) is stopped.

With such a configuration, even if the reel is in the stopped state, if it is stopped in the second stop mode (replay stop mode) (because it is in the max bet state), it is determined that the game is in progress and the management display is displayed. It is possible to improve security by preventing the display of.

Further, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, since only the manager of the game store can perform the operation by the first operation means, it is possible to surely prevent fraudulent acts and the like.

<Error notification display example 2>
Next, display example 2 of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 15 (B). FIG. 15 (B)
Is a diagram showing the flow of the error notification display example 2 in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 15 (B) (1) to (B) (2) are shown in FIGS. 15 (A) (1) to (A).
) It is the same state as the error detection state described using (2), and the reel operating state is operating (
In the state of (error not detected), an error has occurred and the error has been detected. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, detailed description of the same state will be omitted.

<Error notification display example 2 / Reel operating status: operating → stopped>
In the state shown in FIGS. 15 (B) and 15 (3), the reel operating state shown in FIGS. 15 (B) and (2) is in operation (
In the error detection state), the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game store, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, the replay combination was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed. Therefore, although not shown, the replay combination is shown in the symbol display window 113.
The symbol combination corresponding to (in this example, the symbol combination of "replay-replay-replay") is displayed, and as shown in FIGS. 15B and 15 (3), the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is displayed.
In the display area of, the prize notification display ND suggesting that the player has won the replay.
2 (in this example, the image of the replay pattern and the display of the character string "GET !!") is displayed.

In addition, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in a replay light emitting mode suggesting that the player has won the replay role, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) becomes the replay role (replay). Outputs a replay sound effect that suggests that you have won a prize.

<Error notification display example 2 / Error notification display>
The states shown in FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (4) are states in which the error notification ER is started to be displayed after the replay of the replay combination described with reference to FIGS. 15 (A) and 15 (3).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, and In a state where a certain error (in this example, the medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the plurality of reels 110 to 112 are set to the second stop mode (this) by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button). In the example, it is configured to start displaying the error notification ER (error display) when it is stopped at the symbol combination corresponding to the replay combination).
More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 11, the following steps S702 to S702 to
In S703, the error notification possible period (in this example, the setting is not being changed, the reel 110
When it is determined that any of the steps to 112 is not during rotation) and each error notification is not being performed, the error notification is started in the subsequent step S704.

The state shown in FIGS. 15 (B) and 15 (4) is a replay state due to replay, but since it is also an error notification possible period, the main control unit 300 executes the error notification start processing. In this error notification start processing, an error code is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 to send the first sub-control unit 400.
Executes a process of starting error notification when this error command is received from the main control unit 300.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 15A and 15A, an error notification ER (in this example, "selector error has occurred !!" is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). , "Please call the game clerk." Is displayed). In the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game clerk." ”) Is output.

According to this example, in the first state, the state in which the reels are rotating, and the state in which a certain operation is being performed, a plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in a second stop mode (in this example, a replay). When stopped at the combination of symbols corresponding to the combination (replay), the display of the management display is not started, but since it is configured to start the error display, it is during the game (for example, the reel is rotating or the medal is playing). Even if an error occurs in the bet state), error notification is not started, and if the game is stopped, error notification can be started immediately regardless of the reel stop mode to improve security. can.

<Display example of management screen and error notification 1>
Next, the management screen and the display example 1 of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 16A.
FIG. 16A is a diagram showing the flow of the management screen and the error notification display example 1 in chronological order.

<Display example of management screen and error notification 1 / reel operating status: operating (error detection status)>
In the states shown in FIGS. 16A and 16A, the key SW set by the manager of the amusement shop in the reel operating state, the front door 102 in the door open state, the open / close sensor in the open detection state, and the error detection state. Is performed from OFF to ON (a certain operation), and the setting key SW is ON.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. In, even if the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON (a certain operation) is performed, the state does not shift to the state where the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode), and the management screen (administration display) is displayed. It is configured not to start displaying.

More specifically, in the set value confirmation process steps S602 to S603 described with reference to FIG. 10, the main control unit 300 has a set value confirmation valid period (in this example, a MAX bet state (one game can be started). The open / close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110 ~
When any one of 112 is not rotating and is not in error notification) and the setting key SW is determined to be ON, in the subsequent step S604, the setting value display device 101
The current set value is displayed using a.

In the state shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (1), one of the reels 110 to 112 is rotating, and the reels 110 to 112 are rotating.
Since it is not the set value confirmation valid period, the set value confirmation process is terminated, and the subsequent step S604
Since the process of is not executed, the set value is not displayed on the set value display device 101a. Further, since the process of step S605 is not executed, the setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation is started is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, so that it is displayed as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16 (1). In the display area of the means (liquid crystal display device 157), the display of the management screen SD is not started, and the effect during the game is continued.

Further, in the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the reels 110 to 112 rotate. Even if a certain error (in this example, the medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error)) is detected, the error notification ER (error display) is not started to be displayed.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 11, the following steps S702 to S702 to
In S703, the error notification possible period (in this example, the setting is not being changed, the reel 110
When it is determined that any of the steps to 112 is not during rotation) and each error notification is not being performed, the error notification start process is executed in the following step S704.

The states shown in FIGS. 16A and 16 (1) are states in which the reel operating state is in operation (reels 110 to 1).
Since at least one of the twelve is rotating) and the error notification is not possible period, the other device monitoring process is terminated and the error notification is not started, and the in-game effect is continued.

<Display example of management screen and error notification 1 / Reel operating status: operating → stopped>
The state shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (2) is during the operation of the reel operating state shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (1).
In the error detection state), the third stop operation (stop operation) is performed by the manager of the game store, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped.

In the same state, since the small winning combination (bell) was internally won and the third stop operation (stop operation) was performed, the illustration is omitted, but the symbol corresponding to the small winning combination (bell) is shown in the symbol display window 113. The combination (in this example, the symbol combination of "bell-bell-bell") is displayed, and FIG. 16 (A) is displayed.
) As shown in (2), in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), the winning notification display ND1 (in this example, the image of the bell pattern and the bell symbol) suggesting that the small winning combination (bell) has been won. G
ET! !! "Display of the character string) is displayed.

<Display example of management screen and error notification 1 / Error notification display>
The state shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (3) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after the winning of the small winning combination (bell) described with reference to FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (2).

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON (or Operation is being performed), and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1)
(Medal selector error)) When a plurality of reels 110 to 112 are stopped by the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) in the state of detecting (second state), the management screen SD (management display) ) Is not started, but the error notification ER (error display)
Is configured to start displaying.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 11, the following steps S702 to S702 to
In S703, the error notification possible period (in this example, the setting is not being changed, the reel 110
When it is determined that any of the steps to 112 is not during rotation) and each error notification is not being performed, the error notification is started in the subsequent step S704.

Since the state shown in FIGS. 16A and 16A is the error notification period, the main control unit 30
0 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start processing, the payout number display 1
An error code is displayed on 27, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends this error command to the main control unit 30.
When it is received from 0, the process of starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (3), an error notification ER (in this example, "selector error has occurred !!" is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). , "Please call the game clerk." Is displayed). In the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game clerk." ”) Is output.

<Display example of management screen and error notification 1 / error detection status → error non-detection status>
The states shown in FIGS. 16A and 16 (4) are states in which the error detection state shown in FIGS. 16A and 16 (3) is changed to the error non-detection state.

In this state, after the medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) is resolved and the error detection state becomes the error non-detection state, the error cancellation operation by the reset SW is performed.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is open, the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.)
Is emitted in an open light emission mode, and an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). On the other hand, since the error detection state has changed to the error non-detection state, the display of the preparation screen is started.

More specifically, after the main control unit 300 determines that the error notification end condition is satisfied in step S706 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 11, the setting key SW is turned ON in step S708. If it is determined that there is, in step S709, a preparation screen display command instructing the start of display of the preparation screen is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the preparation screen display command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 can display the preparation screen or display the management screen until the management screen can be displayed. Even so, the process of displaying the preparation screen is executed for a predetermined time.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (4), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157,
After the error notification ER is terminated, the display of the preparation screen (in this example, the display of the character string "preparing for management display") suggesting that the display of the management display SD is being prepared is started. The screen before the display of the management screen SD is not limited to this example, and may be, for example, the same screen as a part of the in-game effect or the same screen as a part of the stopped effect. May be good.

<Display example of management screen and error notification 1 / Display of management screen>
The state shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (5) is a state in which an error cancellation operation is performed by the reset SW after the error non-detection state shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (4), and the display of the management screen is started. ..

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON (or Operation is being performed), and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1)
(Medal selector error)) is being detected (second state), the stop buttons 137 to 139 (stop button) stop multiple reels, and an error notification ER (error notification ER)
The display of the error display) is started, and after a certain error (in this example, the medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is not detected, the operation by the reset SW (second operating means) is performed. When this happens, the display of the error notification ER (error display) and the preparation screen is terminated, and the display of the management screen SD (management display) is started.

More specifically, in the set value confirmation process steps S602 to S603 described with reference to FIG. 10, the main control unit 300 has a set value confirmation valid period (in this example, a MAX bet state (one game can be started). The open / close sensor is not in the closed detection state, and the reel 110 ~
When any one of 112 is not rotating and is not in error notification) and the setting key SW is determined to be ON, in the subsequent step S604, the setting value display device 101
The current set value is displayed using a.

In this example, since the set value confirmation valid period and the setting key SW are ON, the setting value display device 101a displays a number indicating the current set value.

Subsequently, in step S605 of the setting value confirmation process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting confirmation start command indicating that the setting confirmation is started to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 performs this. When the setting confirmation start command is received from the main control unit 300, the process of starting the display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16A and 16 (5), the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

As shown in FIGS. 16A and 16', even if the error detection state is the error non-detection state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is reset when the closure detection state is set. Even if an operation (error canceling operation) is performed by the SW (second operating means), the error cannot be cleared, and the error notification ER may be continued.

Further, when the management screen SD is displayed during the payout number display, the payout number display may be terminated. Further, even if a certain error occurs during the display of the management screen SD, the error notification for notifying the occurrence of the certain error may not be performed.

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1).
00, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) provided on the front surface of the game table, and the above. A detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body (for example, the open / close sensor shown in FIG. 1) and a first operation means (for example, an operation of turning from OFF to ON by rotating the door body). , Setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and the plurality of reels are provided corresponding to each of the above-mentioned. A plurality of stop buttons for individually stopping the rotation of the reel (for example, stop buttons 137 to
139) and the game table provided, the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is the door. When the body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying the management display for the administrator, and the detection state of the detection means. Is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), and is the first state. It is configured so that the display of the management display is not started even if the certain operation is performed in the state where the reel is rotating, and a certain error occurs in the state where the reel is stopped. (for example,
When a medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error) is detected, the display of an error display related to the certain error can be started, and the reel is rotating in the first state. In the above, even if the certain error is detected, the display of the error display is not started, and the first state, the state in which the reel is rotating, and the certain operation are performed. When the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button in the state of being and the state of detecting the certain error (hereinafter, referred to as "second state"), the display of the management display is started. Although not, the display of the error display (for example, FIGS. 16 (A) (3) (3)
) Is configured to start the error notification ER) shown in).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, when the reels are stopped, the error display is displayed with priority over the management display, so that the security can be improved.

A second operating means (for example, a reset SW) is provided, and in the second state, the plurality of reels are stopped by the stop button, the display of the error display is started, and the certain error is detected. When the operation by the second operating means is performed after the state is not set, the display of the error display is terminated and the management display (for example, the screen for the administrator shown in FIGS. 16A and 16 (5)) is terminated. It may be configured to start the display of SD).

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a game table that is easy for the game clerk to use by canceling the error and displaying the management display after the error display is completed.

Further, when the operation by the second operating means is performed, the display of the error display is terminated, and the display of the management display is started, a certain display (before the display of the management display is started) is performed. For example, it may be configured to start the display of the preparation screen shown in FIGS. 16 (A) and 16 (4).

With such a configuration, it is possible to visually recognize that the second operation means has been accepted, and it is possible to enhance the convenience of the manager of the game store.

Further, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, since only the manager of the game store can perform the operation by the first operation means, it is possible to surely prevent fraudulent acts and the like.

Further, the second operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, since only the manager of the game store can perform the operation by the second operating means, it is possible to surely prevent fraudulent acts and the like.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification>
Next, the management screen and the display example 2 of the error notification will be described with reference to FIG. 16 (B).
FIG. 16B is a diagram showing the flow of the management screen and the error notification display example 2 in chronological order.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification / Turn on the setting key SW when the power is turned off>
In the states shown in FIGS. 16B and 16B, the setting key SW is set by the manager of the game store when the power supply state is the power OFF state, the front door 102 is the door body open state, the open / close sensor is the open detection state, and the error detection state. An operation (certain operation) from OFF to ON is performed, and the setting key SW is ON.

In the same state, the error is detected, but since the power is off, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is non-output. , The display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is hidden.

<Display example of management screen and error notification 2 / Start of setting change mode, display of management screen>
The state shown in FIGS. 16 (B) and 16 (2) is the setting key SW described with reference to FIGS. 16 (B) and (1).
Is ON, the operation by the power switch is performed by the manager of the game store, and the power state is changed from the power OFF to the power ON.

The slot machine 100 is configured to shift to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode) when the power is turned on while the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is performed. In the same state, the state shifts to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode), and the setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277).

Further, in the state shown in FIGS. 16B and 16B, the front door 102 is open, so that the front door 102 is open.
The light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emitting mode.

Further, in the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the setting key SW is turned from OFF to O.
Power is supplied in a state in which an operation to be set to N (a certain operation) is being performed and a state in which a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1 (medal selector error)) is detected (second state). When is turned on, the display of the error notification ER (error display) is not started, but the display of the management screen (management display) is started.

More specifically, the main control unit 300 has the initial setting process step S described with reference to FIG.
In 203 to S204, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the setting key SW is determined to be ON, the setting change process described with reference to FIG. 7 is started. In this example, the front door 102 is started.
Is in the open state and the setting key SW is ON, so that the setting change process is started.

Subsequently, in step S302 of this setting change process, the main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command indicating that the setting change is started to the first sub control unit 400, and the first sub control unit 400 performs this. When the setting change start command is received from the main control unit 300, the process of starting the display of the management screen is executed. As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16B, the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

Subsequently, the main control unit 300 displays the current set value using the set value display device 101a in step S304 of the setting change process.

<Display example 2 of management screen and error notification / Confirmation of set value>
The states shown in FIGS. 16B and 16B are states in which the manager of the game store has operated the start lever 135 in the setting change mode.

The main control unit 300 has the start lever 135 in step S307 of the setting change process.
If it is determined that the operation of is performed, in the following steps S308 to S309,
The set value displayed on the set value display device 101a is stored (confirmed) as a new set value, the display of the set value display device 101a is erased, and the set value is hidden.

<Display example of management screen and error notification 2 / Display of error notification>
The state shown in FIGS. 16 (B) and 16 (4) is a state in which the display of the error notification ER is started after the set value shown in FIGS. 16 (B) and (3) is confirmed.

In the slot machine 100, the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state, the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), and the setting key SW is turned from OFF to ON (or Operation) and a certain error (in this example, medal insertion error 1)
(Medal selector error)) is being detected (second state), and after the operation by the start lever 135 is performed, the operation (certain operation) of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON is canceled. The display of the management screen (management display) is terminated, and the display of the error notification ER (error display) is started.

More specifically, when the main control unit 300 detects each error in step S701 of the other device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 11, the following steps S702 to S702 to
In S703, the error notification possible period (in this example, the setting is not being changed, the reel 110
When it is determined that any of the steps to 112 is not during rotation) and each error notification is not being performed, the error notification is started in the subsequent step S704.

Since the state shown in FIGS. 16B and 16B is the error notification period, the main control unit 30
0 executes error notification start processing. In this error notification start processing, the payout number display 1
An error code is displayed on 27, and an error command corresponding to the detected error is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends this error command to the main control unit 30.
When it is received from 0, the process of starting error notification is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 16B and 16B, an error notification ER (in this example, "selector error has occurred !!" is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). , "Please call the game clerk." Is displayed). In the same state, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) emit light in an error emission mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an error sound (for example, "An error has occurred. Please call the game clerk." ”) Is output.

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1).
00, the pachinko machine) includes a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), a door body that can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1) provided on the front surface of the game table, and the above. A detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body (for example, the open / close sensor shown in FIG. 1) and a first operation means (for example, an operation of turning from OFF to ON by rotating the door body). , Setting key SW), a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate, and the plurality of reels are provided corresponding to each of the above-mentioned. A plurality of stop buttons for individually stopping the rotation of the reel (for example, stop buttons 137 to
139) and the game table provided, the detection means is a means capable of changing the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state, and the detection means is the door. When the body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the open detection state, and the display means is a means capable of displaying the management display for the administrator, and the detection state of the detection means. Is configured to be able to start displaying the management display when the certain operation is performed in the open detection state (hereinafter referred to as "first state"), and a certain error (for example, a medal) is configured. Input error 1 (
When a medal selector error)) is detected, the display of the error display related to the certain error can be started, and the first state, the state in which the operation is performed, and the certain state. When the power is turned on in the state where an error is detected (hereinafter referred to as "second state"), the display of the error display is not started, but the display for management (for example, FIG. 16 (for example)
B) The game console is configured to start displaying the administrator screen SD) shown in (2).

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, by displaying the management display with priority over the error display when the power is turned on, it is possible to provide a game console that is easy to use for the manager of the game store. ..

A start lever (for example, a start lever 135) is provided, and when the certain operation is released after the operation by the start lever is performed in the second state, the display of the management display is terminated. It may be configured to start the display of the error display (for example, the error notification ER shown in FIGS. 16 (B) and 16 (4)).

With such a configuration, after the operation of the start lever, the management screen can be closed and the error display can be started, so that the occurrence of an error can be reliably notified.

Further, a second operating means (for example, a reset SW) is provided so that the error cannot be cleared even if the operation by the second operating means is performed when the detection state of the detecting means is the closed detection state. It may be configured.

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts such as forcibly canceling the error state, and it is possible to improve security.

Further, the first operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, since only the manager of the game store can perform the operation by the first operation means, it is possible to surely prevent fraudulent acts and the like.

Further, the second operating means may be a means provided at a position where the door body can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.

With such a configuration, since only the manager of the game store can perform the operation by the second operating means, it is possible to surely prevent fraudulent acts and the like.

<Display of setting history>
Next, the display of the setting history will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (A). FIG. 17A is a diagram showing the flow of display of the setting history in chronological order.

The states shown in FIGS. 17 (A) (1) to (A) (2) are shown in FIGS. 12 (A) (1) to (A).
) It is the same state as the setting change mode explained using (2), and the power is turned on with the operation of turning the setting key SW from OFF to ON, and the setting value can be changed (setting change). Mode) has been entered. In order to avoid duplicate explanations, detailed description of the same state will be omitted.

<Specific operation in setting history display / setting change mode>
The state shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (3) is a state in which a specific operation is performed in the setting change mode and the display of the setting history is started.

The display means of the slot machine 100 (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157) is the first event (
In this example, it is possible to display a history display (setting history SH in this example) showing the history of occurrence (determination of the setting value by changing the setting), and in a certain state (setting change mode in this example). When the first event (determination of the set value by changing the setting) occurs, in a certain state (setting change mode) in which the first event (determination of the setting value by changing the setting) occurs, it occurred in the past. It is possible to display the history display (setting history SH) related to the first event (determination of the set value by changing the setting).

In this example, the settings as shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (3) are set when the setting history item is selected from the menu display of the management screen SD by the specific operation (operation by the cross-shaped button 193). Display history SH.

The display mode of the setting history SH is not particularly limited, but in this example, the date and time when the setting change (or setting confirmation) is performed, the setting value set (or confirmed) by the setting change (or setting confirmation), and the operation content. (Setting change or setting confirmation) can be displayed in chronological order, for example, "(N).
o1) Setting change / confirmation date and time: XX, XX, 0:00, XX, setting value: 6, operation: change, (N
o2) Setting change / confirmation date and time: XX, XX, XX, XX, setting value: 6, operation: confirmation, etc., in chronological order Display (in order of newest (or oldest) date and time).

According to this example, since the manager of the game store can easily check the set values and the like set in the past, it is possible to provide a game table that is easy to use for the management of the game store. Further, even if it is displayed to the player by fraudulent operation, it is unlikely to be used for fraudulent activity because it is not a history display related to the event that occurred this time but a history display related to the event that occurred in the past.

<Display setting history / Confirm setting value in setting change mode>
The states shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (4) are states in which the manager of the game store has operated the start lever 135 in the setting change mode.

The main control unit 300 has the start lever 135 in step S307 of the setting change process.
If it is determined that the operation of is performed, in the following steps S308 to S309,
The set value displayed on the set value display device 101a is stored (confirmed) as a new set value (here, setting 5), the display of the set value display device 101a is erased, and the set value is hidden. To.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the first event (determination of the set value by changing the setting) occurs in a certain state (in this example, the setting change mode), the first event (setting value by changing the setting) occurs. In a certain state (setting change mode) in which confirmation) has occurred, the history display (setting history SH) relating to the first event (confirmation of the setting value by changing the setting) that has occurred this time cannot be displayed.

According to this example, the history of the setting value due to the current setting change (history display related to the first event that occurred this time) is not displayed. Therefore, for example, when the player illegally performs the setting change operation, the setting is changed. It is possible to improve security by not being able to easily confirm whether or not the implementation was performed correctly.

Since the setting key is kept ON in the state shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (4), the setting history S
The display of H continues, but the setting history corresponding to the setting value set this time in the setting change mode (in this example, the date and time when the setting change was made, the setting value set by the setting change, and the operation content (setting). Change)) is not displayed.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the first event (determination of the set value by changing the setting) occurs in a certain state (in this example, the setting change mode), the first event (setting value by changing the setting) occurs. In a certain state (setting change mode) in which confirmation) occurs, at least a part of the history display (setting history SH) related to the first event (setting value confirmation by setting change) that occurred in the past can be deleted. On the other hand, the history display (setting history SH) relating to the first event (determination of the set value by changing the setting) that has occurred this time cannot be erased.

Specifically, the operation is performed by the cross-shaped button 193, and the "setting history SH" is arranged below the "setting history SH".
When the "Delete history" button is selected and the button is pressed, at least a part of the past setting history SH (in this example, only the displayed setting history SH) is deleted.

According to this example, the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of the setting value due to this setting change) cannot be cleared (erased), so if the setting is changed illegally, the evidence of fraudulent activity will be destroyed. It is difficult to achieve this, and security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of the setting value due to this setting change), you need to move to a certain state again, so there is a high risk for fraudsters. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

<Display setting history / Exit setting change mode>
The state shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (5) is a state in which the manager of the game store performs an operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF in the setting change mode, and the setting key SW is turned OFF.

In step S310 of the setting change process, the main control unit 300 turns off the setting key SW.
If it is determined that, the first setting change end command indicating that the setting change is ended is issued.
It is transmitted to the sub control unit 400, and when the first sub control unit 400 receives the setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400 executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (5), the setting history SH of the management screen SD displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. .. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, as a normal effect, the effect to be executed while the reels 110 to 112 are stopped is started.

<Display setting history / Start setting confirmation mode>
In the state shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (6), the setting key SW is set by the manager of the game store when the front door 102 shown in FIGS. OFF
The operation (certain operation) to turn on is performed, and the setting key SW is turned on.

The slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is turned on.
Since it is configured to shift to a state where the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when the operation to be performed is performed, in the same state, the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Transition.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the setting key SW is turned off.
When an operation (certain operation) to turn on from is performed, the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started, and the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is managed. The screen SD is displayed, but in this example, since the setting history item was selected in the latest management screen SD, as shown in FIGS. 17 (A) and 17 (6), in the setting confirmation mode, First, the setting history SH is displayed.

In this example, since the set value is changed to the setting 5 in the latest setting change mode (FIGS. 17 (A) and (4)), the first event (change of the set value) that occurred in the past in the setting history SH. )
As a history display corresponding to "(No3) Setting change / confirmation date and time: 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇 〇
As a history display of "seconds, setting value: 5, operation: change" and a history display corresponding to the confirmation of the setting value in this setting confirmation mode, "(No4) setting change / confirmation date and time: 0 years" A history display such as "0 o'clock 0 o'clock o'clock on 0 o'clock, set value: 5, operation: confirmation" is additionally displayed.

According to this example, since the manager of the game store can easily check the set values and the like set in the past, it is possible to provide a game table that is easy to use for the management of the game store.

<Display error history>
Next, the display of the error history will be described with reference to FIG. 17 (B). FIG. 17 (B) shows
It is the figure which showed the flow of the display of an error history in chronological order.

<Display error history / Start setting confirmation mode>
In the states shown in FIGS. 17B and 17B, when the power supply state is the power ON state, the front door 102 is the door body open state, and the open / close sensor is the open detection state, the setting key SW is changed from OFF to ON by the manager of the game store. Operation (certain operation) is performed, and the setting key SW is turned on.

The slot machine 100 turns the setting key SW from OFF to ON while the power is turned on.
Since it is configured to shift to a state where the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode) when the operation to be performed is performed, in the same state, the setting value can be confirmed (setting confirmation mode). Transition.

Further, in the slot machine 100, when the front door 102 (door body) is in the open state and the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) is the open detection state (first state), the setting key SW is turned off.
As shown in FIGS. 17 (B) and 17 (1), the display of the management screen SD (management display) can be started when an operation (certain operation) to turn on from is performed. The management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157).

<Specific operation in error history display / setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIGS. 17B and 17B is a state in which a specific operation is performed in the setting confirmation mode and the display of the error history is started.

The display means (liquid crystal display device 157) of the slot machine 100 is the second event (in this example, the display means).
It is possible to display a history display (error history EH in this example) showing the history of occurrence of door opening or door closing, and a second event (door in this example) in a certain state (setting confirmation mode in this example). In a certain state (setting confirmation mode) in which the first event (door opening or door closing) occurs when an opening or door closing occurs, the first event (door opening or door closing) that occurred this time or in the past It is possible to display a history display (error history EH) related to (door closure).

More specifically, in step S502 of the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 9, the main control unit 300 detects that the front door 102 has been opened when it detects a signal indicating that the front door 102 is in the open detection state. The opening detection information shown is stored in the RAM 308, and the front door 10 is stored.
A door opening detection command indicating that the opening of 2 is detected is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first
When the sub-control unit 400 receives the door opening detection command from the main control unit 300, the opening detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been opened (in this example, the information indicating "opening" and the information indicating "opening" are used.
The opening date and time) is stored in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order, and the door opening notification is performed.

On the other hand, when the main control unit 300 detects a signal indicating that the front door 102 is in the open detection state in step S502 of the device monitoring process, the main control unit 300 stores the closure detection information indicating that the front door 102 is closed in the RAM 308 and also stores it in the RAM 308. A door closing detection command indicating that the front door 102 has been closed is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 receives the door closing detection command from the main control unit 300. The closing detection information (in this example, the information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closing) indicating that the front door 102 has been closed is stored in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order.

In this example, when the error history item is selected from the menu display of the management screen SD by the specific operation (operation by the cross-shaped button 193), the release detection information (information indicating "open" and release) are used. (Date and time) and closure detection information (information indicating “closed” and date and time of closure) are acquired from RAM 408, and as shown in FIGS. 17B and 17B, display means (liquid crystal display device 1).
In the display area of 57), the error history EH that has occurred this time and in the past is displayed.

The display mode of the error history EH is not particularly limited, but in this example, the error occurrence date and time and the content of the error can be displayed in chronological order. 〇 〇 〇 minutes ○ seconds, occurrence error: selector error, (No2) error occurrence date and time: 〇 〇 〇 days 〇 〇 〇 minutes 〇 seconds, occurrence error: door open, (No 3) error occurrence date and time: 〇 〇 month 〇Day 〇0:00 ○sec, Occurrence error: Door closed, (No4) Error occurrence date and time: 〇October 0, 〇0:00 ○ sec, Occurrence error: Door open ”, which occurred this time and in the past Display the items related to the error in chronological order (in order of newest (or oldest) date and time).

<Error history display / Front door: Door open state → Door closed state>
In the state shown in FIGS. 17 (B) and 17 (3), the front door 102 is closed and the front door 102 is changed from the door body open state to the door body closed state in the door body open state shown in FIGS. It is in a state of being.

The slot machine 100 has an error history EH even when the detection state of the open / close sensor (detection means) changes from the open detection state to the closed detection state in the state where the error history EH (management display) is displayed. It is configured to continue the display of (management display), and in this example, since the setting value is being confirmed and the setting key SW is ON, the display of the error history EH is continued. Further, in the same state, a light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) that emitted light in the open mode.
Is turned off, and the output sound of the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) that was outputting the open sound is set to non-output.

Further, since the front door 102 has changed from the door open state to the door closed state, the error history E
As a history display corresponding to the first event (door opening error) that occurred this time, "(No5)
) Error occurrence date and time: 0:00, 0:00, XX, XX, XX (date and time when the closure of the front door 102 was detected),
The history display "Occurrence error: Door closed" is additionally displayed.

According to this example, since the history of opening and closing of the door body can be displayed, it is possible to check the presence or absence of fraudulent activities and the past work status, which enhances the convenience of the game store manager. Can be done.

<Display error history / Exit setting confirmation mode>
The state shown in FIGS. 17 (B) and 17 (4) is a state in which the administrator of the game store performs an operation of turning the setting key SW from ON to OFF in the setting confirmation mode, and the setting key SW is turned OFF.

In the main control unit 300, the setting key SW is OF in step S606 of the set value confirmation process.
If it is determined to be F, a setting confirmation end command indicating that the setting confirmation is terminated is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 sends this setting confirmation end command to the main control unit. When it is received from 300, the process of ending the display of the management screen is executed.

As a result, as shown in FIGS. 17B and 17B, the error history EH displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157) is erased, and the normal effect is started. In this example, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the reels 110 to 1 are usually produced.
The effect to be executed while the 12 is stopped is started.

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1).
00, the pachinko machine) is a game table provided with display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 1), and the display means is the first event (for example, determination of a set value by changing a setting). History display showing the history of occurrence of (for example, setting history SH shown in FIGS. 17A and 17A)
The display means can display a history display (for example, the error history EH shown in FIGS. 17B and 17B) showing a history of occurrence of a second event (for example, door opening or door closing). ) Can be displayed, and when the second event occurs in a certain state, in the certain state where the second event occurs, the history display regarding the second event that occurred this time is displayed. It is displayable, and when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state where the first event occurs, the history display regarding the first event that occurred this time is displayed. It is a game table characterized by being impossible.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, since the history display (history of the setting value due to the setting change this time) regarding the first event that occurred this time is not displayed, for example, the player illegally performs the setting change operation. In this case, it is not possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change has been performed correctly, so that the security can be improved.

Further, when the second event occurs in the certain state, the history display related to the second event that has occurred in the past can be displayed in the certain state where the second event occurs. Yes, when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state where the first event occurs, the history display regarding the first event that has occurred in the past can be displayed. There may be.

With such a configuration, the manager of the game store can easily check the set values and the like set in the past, so that it is possible to provide a game table that is easy to use for the management of the game store. Further, even if it is displayed to the player by fraudulent operation, it is unlikely to be used for fraudulent activity because it is a history display related to an event that has occurred in the past.

Further, when the first event occurs in the certain state, in the certain state where the first event occurs, at least a part of the history regarding the first event that occurred in the past is taken. While erasable, the history of the first event that occurred this time may not be erasable.

With such a configuration, the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of the setting value due to this setting change) cannot be cleared, so if the setting is changed illegally, the evidence of fraudulent activity should be obliterated. Is difficult, and security can be improved. In addition, if you want to clear the history of the first event that occurred this time (history of the setting value due to this setting change), you need to move to a certain state again, so there is a high risk for fraudsters. It is possible to prevent fraudulent activities.

Further, the operation means may be provided, and the first event may be an operation of determining a set value by the operation means.

With such a configuration, even if an operation for confirming the set value is performed, the set value confirmed by the operation is not displayed. Therefore, for example, when the player illegally performs the setting change operation. In addition, it is not possible to easily confirm whether or not the setting change has been performed correctly, so that the security can be improved.

Further, a door body that is provided on the front surface of the game table and can be opened and closed (for example, the front door 102 shown in FIG. 1).
And a detection means (for example, an open / close sensor) capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body, and the detection means may change the detection state to the closed detection state when the door body is in the closed state. It is a possible means, and the second event may be that the detection state of the detection means becomes the closure detection state.

With such a configuration, it is possible to display the history of opening and closing of the door body, so that it is possible to check the presence or absence of fraudulent activities and the past work status, which is convenient for the manager of the amusement store. Can be enhanced.

<Volume adjustment>
Next, the volume adjustment will be described with reference to FIG.

<When the volume adjustment / management screen is not displayed>
FIG. 18A is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is not displayed.

In FIGS. 18A and 18A, when the power is on, the front door 102 is in the door closed state, and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, the stopped effect is executed and the management screen is not displayed. It is a state.

In the same state, since the reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the light emitter (various lamps 42).
0 etc.) is stopped and emits light in a light emitting mode, and is stopped from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277) B
The GM is output, and the stopped effect is displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157), but in this example, the stopped BGM is output at a certain volume (volume 4 in this example). ..

FIGS. 18 (A) and 18 (2) show a state in which the volume increasing operation is performed while the volume value display VD is not displayed.

In the same state, when the volume value display VD is not displayed, the volume increasing operation for increasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or the upper button of the cross button 193 or When the operation by the right button is accepted, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (volume 4 in this example) is started, but the volume is not increased.

In this example, the increase in volume has been described, but the decrease in volume is also the volume value display V.
When D is not displayed, a volume reduction operation (in this example, an operation using the lower button or the left button of the cross button 193) for reducing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) is accepted. Taking this as an opportunity, the current volume value (in this example, volume 4)
) Is started to be displayed, but the volume is not reduced.

18 (A) and 18 (3) are states in which the volume increasing operation is performed while the volume value display VD shown in FIGS. (A) and (2) is displayed.

In the same state, the volume is increased by one step when the volume increase operation (in this example, the operation by the upper button or the right button of the cross button 193) is accepted while the volume value display VD is displayed. Volume value display V indicating the volume value after the increase (volume 5 in this example)
While displaying D, the stopped BGM is output at the increased volume value (volume 5 in this example).

In this example, the increase in volume has been described, but the decrease in volume is also performed by the volume decrease operation (in this example, the operation by the lower button or the left button of the cross button 193) in the state where the volume value display VD is displayed. ) Is accepted, the volume is reduced by one step, the volume value display VD indicating the reduced volume value (volume 3 in this example) is displayed, and the reduced volume value (in this example) is displayed. , Volume 3) outputs the stopped BGM.

An administrator volume adjustment switch may be provided as an operating means provided at a position where the front door 102 (door body) can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is open. In this case, FIGS. ), The volume may be adjusted when the volume increasing operation or the volume decreasing operation is performed by the volume adjustment switch for the administrator in the state where the volume value display VD is displayed. The volume value display VD indicating the volume value of the door may be displayed.

<When the volume adjustment / management screen is displayed>
FIG. 18B is a diagram showing the flow of volume adjustment in chronological order when the management screen is displayed.

In FIGS. 18B and 18 (1), the setting key SW is ON when the power is ON, the front door 102 is in the door open state, and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, and the management screen SD is displayed. It is in the state of being.

In the same state, since the front door 102 is in the open state, the light emitter (various lamps 420).
Etc.) are emitted in an open light emission mode, an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the management screen SD is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. The open sound is output at the volume (volume 4 in this example).

The opening sound and the error sound may be output at a predetermined volume (for example, the maximum volume) regardless of the set volume value.

18 (B) and 18 (2) show a state in which the volume increasing operation is performed while the volume value display VD2 is not displayed.

In the same state, when the volume value display VD2 is not displayed, the volume increasing operation for increasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or the upper button of the cross button 193 or When the operation by the right button is accepted, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (volume 4 in this example) is started, but the volume is not increased.

In this example, the increase in volume has been described, but the decrease in volume is also for reducing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277) in the state where the volume value display VD is not displayed. When the volume reduction operation (in this example, the operation by the down button or the left button of the cross button 193) is accepted, the display of the volume value display VD indicating the current volume value (volume 4 in this example) is started. On the other hand, the volume is not reduced.

18 (B) and 18 (3) are states in which the volume increasing operation is performed while the volume value display VD2 shown in FIGS. 18 (B) and (2) is displayed.

In the same state, in the state where the volume value display VD2 is displayed, the volume increasing operation for increasing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) (in this example, the upper button of the cross button 193 or the upper button of the cross button 193 or The operation by the right button) was accepted, but since the management screen SD is displayed, the volume is not increased and the current volume value (volume 4 in this example).
The display of the volume value display VD indicating is continued.

In this example, the increase in volume has been described, but the decrease in volume is also for reducing the volume output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277) in the state where the volume value display VD2 is displayed. Even when the volume reduction operation (in this example, the operation by the down button or the left button of the cross button 193) is accepted, the volume is not reduced because the management screen SD is displayed, and the current volume is not reduced. The display of the volume value display VD indicating the volume value (volume 4 in this example) is continued.

An administrator volume adjustment switch may be provided as an operating means provided at a position where the front door 102 (door body) can be operated only when the front door 102 (door body) is open. In this case, FIGS. ), The volume may be adjusted when the volume increasing operation or the volume decreasing operation is performed by the volume adjustment switch for the administrator in the state where the volume value display VD is displayed. The volume value display VD indicating the volume value of the door may be displayed.

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is a simple game flow showing the game state of the AT system.

First, the AT-type game state is roughly classified into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. What is a low navigation state?
It is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also called a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, a normal section, or a normal state. The high navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is higher than that in the low navigation state (a state that is more advantageous than the low navigation state (normal state) with respect to the operation navigation (notification of operation information)), and the AT mode, It is also called an advantageous section or an advantageous state.

Here, the operation navigation is an effect of notifying the operation information (for example, the correct operation order and the timing of the stop operation) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (operation means) in order to obtain a medal and maintain an advantageous gaming state. Good, for example, an effect that informs the correct operation order of the push order combination (for example, ""
The effect of displaying the characters "left → middle → right") is applicable.

The high navigation state is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings a favorable result to the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when the game is played for a predetermined period. The ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate), is advantageous. Further, since the stock time and the CZ state are more likely to shift to the CZ state and the AT state than the normal stage, it can be said that the stock time and the CZ state are more advantageous than the normal stage.

In this example, the low navigation state is the state where the execution probability of the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is the state where the execution probability of the operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed or the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and this is called a staging state. In this example, the production state in the low navigation state is equipped with a special stage, and the production state in the high navigation state is the stock time (hereinafter, may be referred to as “ST”), the normal stage, and the CZ state (compared to the normal stage). It is easy to shift to the AT state) and has the AT state. Of these production states, the AT state is, in principle, a state in which the number of balls is increased. The effect state is not limited to this example, and for example, the high navigation state may include other effect states such as a definite notification state and a pullback state.

In the present embodiment, in the special stage of the low navigation state (normal section), when the condition (A) is satisfied (in this example, when a winning combination other than the loss is won), the high navigation state (advantageous section).
Shift to stock time. After clearing the RAM such as changing the settings, the condition (A)
) May be established, it may be configured to shift to the stock time, or it may be configured not to shift.

The stock time (first game state) is the right to shift to the CZ state (hereinafter, simply "CZ").
It is possible to obtain a CZ lottery or stock one or more CZs.

In this stock time, even if the CZ lottery is won, the CZ state is not changed until the stock time specified number of games (first period, 50 games in this example) has elapsed, and the CZ acquired by the CZ lottery is used. Stock (accumulate).

Then, when the condition (B) is satisfied (in this example, when the stock time specified number of games (50 games in this example) has elapsed without stocking CZ), the stage shifts to the normal stage. When the condition (C) is satisfied (in this example, the CZ is stocked and the stock time specified number of games (50 games in this example) has elapsed), the game shifts to the CZ state. The transition destination when the condition (C) is satisfied in the stock time is not limited to the CZ state, and may be configured to transition to the CZ state after passing through the normal stage, for example.

The end condition of the stock time of the condition (B) and the condition (C) is not limited to this example, and is 50.
It may be less or more than the game.

According to this example, even if the CZ lottery is won (even if a certain condition is satisfied), the game is in the CZ state (second game state) until the stock time specified number of games (first period) is completed. Since there is no transition, the game can be enjoyed for a long period of time in the stock time specified number of games (first period), and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, when shifting from the normal section to the advantageous section, the transition to the CZ state or the AT state does not occur until the stock time specified number of games elapses. Therefore, for example, the previous advantageous section (A).
In the case of shifting to the next advantageous section from the end of the T state) through the normal section, it is possible to avoid a situation in which too many balls are ejected in a short time and the gambling becomes higher than necessary.

The normal stage has various staging stages, and is a state in which a CZ lottery capable of acquiring the right (CZ) to shift to the CZ state is possible.

In this normal stage, when the condition (D) is satisfied (in this example, when the CZ is won).
In addition, it immediately shifts to the CZ state without stocking CZ.

The CZ state (second game state) is more advantageous to the player than the normal game state (special stage) in the low navigation state (normal section) and the normal stage in the high navigation state (advantageous section). (For example, it is easier to shift to the AT state when the rare role is won in the CZ state than when the rare role is won in the normal stage), in this example, the weak CZ state (third game state). , Strong CZ state (fourth game state) and AT confirmed CZ state (fourth game state)
There is. The strong CZ state is a state in which the state is more likely to shift to the AT state than the weak CZ state, and the AT confirmed CZ state is a state in which the state always shifts to the AT state after the end of the CZ state.

In the CZ state, when the condition (E) is satisfied (in this example, C is not won in the AT in the CZ state).
When the number of Z predetermined games (9 games in this example) has elapsed), the stage shifts to the normal stage, and when the condition (F) is satisfied (in this example, the AT is won in the CZ state and the CZ predetermined number of games (in this example). In this example, when 9 games) have passed), the AT state is entered.

The end condition of the CZ state of the condition (E) and the condition (F) is not limited to this example, and may be less than 9 games or more, but more than the stock time. The number of games is desirable. Further, the CZ state may be terminated by winning a specified number of winning combinations, or the AT state may be entered before the predetermined number of games has elapsed when the AT state is won (CZ). You may end the state).

The AT state is a state in which AT games can be played a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 games per set), and is more than a special stage in a low navigation state (normal section) or a stock time in a high navigation state (advantageous section). It is an advantageous state for the player, and in this example, the normal AT, the AT addition state in which the AT game addition lottery is executed, and the ED (ending) suggesting the end of the high navigation state.
There is an ED state in which the effect is executed.

Further, in this AT state, a set continuous lottery for whether or not to continue the AT game (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed, and when the set continuous lottery is won, a predetermined number of times (in this example, a lottery) is further executed. An AT game (30 games per set) is given, and the AT state is extended.

When the condition (G) is satisfied in this AT state (when the AT end condition is satisfied (in this example, when all the games are digested in the AT state), or when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied (this example). Then, when 1500 games have passed in the advantageous section, or when 2400 cards have been paid out in the advantageous section), the game shifts to the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section).

The condition for ending the advantageous section is an example, and it may be the case that 3000 games have passed, or 3
Even if 000 sheets are paid out.

Also, in this example, the staging state was set as a special stage in the low navigation state (normal section),
Even in the low navigation state (normal section), the production state may be the stock time or the normal stage. In other words, even in the low navigation state (normal section), the staging state is the stock time (or / /
And the normal stage), the stock time (or / and the normal stage) has a period of a low navigation state (normal section) and a period of a high navigation state (advantageous section). Also, on the contrary,
Even when the vehicle shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section), the special stage may be continued.

<CZ lottery>
Next, the CZ lottery executed in the stock time and the normal stage will be described with reference to FIGS. 20 (b) and 20 (c).

The CZ lottery is a lottery in which the right to shift to the CZ state (CZ) can be acquired. When the cherry) is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, C described later
A CZ lottery using the Z determination table is executed.

The lottery mode of the CZ lottery includes a high probability mode in which the winning probability of the CZ lottery is relatively high and a CZ.
There is a low probability mode in which the winning probability of the lottery is relatively low. When shifting to the normal stage or stock time, the low probability mode is set first, but when a certain winning combination (for example, a rare role with a low winning probability) is won in each production state, the high probability mode is set. Will be done.

<CZ lottery / normal stage>
FIG. 20B is a diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for a CZ lottery in a normal stage. For convenience of explanation, only the CZ determination table referred to when the set value is set 1 is illustrated, but for settings 2 to 6, it is preferable that the larger the set value, the higher the probability of winning the CZ lottery. (The same applies to the stock time CZ judgment table).

In the normal stage (low probability mode), the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is the symbol display window 1.
When the stop display is displayed on 13, there is a 2% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining the CZ), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 1% probability. If you win the CZ lottery (acquire CZ) and the symbol combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 6% chance that you will win the CZ lottery (acquire CZ) and be strong. When the symbol combination corresponding to the cherry is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 27% probability of winning the CZ lottery (acquiring the CZ).

Also, in the normal stage (high probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 13% chance of winning the CZ lottery (acquiring CZ).
, When the symbol combination corresponding to the watermelon is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 7% probability of winning the CZ lottery (acquiring the CZ), and the symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is the symbol display window 1.
When the stop display is displayed on 13, there is a 20% probability of winning the CZ lottery (obtaining the CZ), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 34% probability. Win the CZ lottery (acquire CZ).

<CZ lottery / stock time>
FIG. 20 (c) is a diagram showing an example of a CZ determination table used for a CZ lottery at stock time.

In the stock time (low probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 10% chance of winning the CZ lottery (acquiring the CZ) and corresponding to the watermelon. When the symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 5% probability that C will be displayed.
Winning the Z lottery (acquiring CZ), the symbol combination corresponding to the chance eye is the symbol display window 113
When the stop display is displayed, there is a 12% probability of winning the CZ lottery (acquiring the CZ), and when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed in the symbol display window 113, there is a 30% probability. C
Win the Z lottery (acquire CZ). In this example, even in the same low probability mode, the stock time (low probability mode) is easier to win the CZ lottery than the normal stage (low probability mode) (CZ is easier to obtain).

Also, in stock time (high probability mode), when the symbol combination corresponding to the weak cherry is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, there is a 15% chance of winning the CZ lottery (acquiring CZ) and becoming a watermelon. When the corresponding symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113, the CZ lottery is won (CZ is acquired) with a probability of 11%, and the symbol combination corresponding to the chance is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113. In that case, there is a 40% chance of winning the CZ lottery (acquiring CZ) and
100% when the symbol combination corresponding to the strong cherry is stopped and displayed on the symbol display window 113.
Win the CZ lottery with the probability of (acquire CZ). In this example, even in the same high probability mode, the stock time (high probability mode) is CZ more than the normal stage (high probability mode).
Easy to win the lottery (easy to get CZ).

According to this example, it is possible to have a sense of expectation for an advantageous section (high probability mode) in the stock time (first period), and to increase the player's motivation to play in the stock time (first period). Can be done.

<Example of transition of production state in advantageous section>
Next, an example of transition of the effect state in the advantageous section will be described with reference to FIG. 20 (a).
FIG. 20A is a diagram showing a transition example of the effect state in the advantageous section.

As described with reference to FIG. 19, in the special stage in the low navigation state (normal section), when a winning combination other than the loss is won, the stock time shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section).

The transition condition to the stock time is not limited to this example, and for example, when the transition condition from the low navigation state (normal section) to the high navigation state (advantageous section) is satisfied, the transition to the stock time is always performed. It may be configured so as to be configured, whether or not to shift to the stock time may be decided by lottery, or it may be configured not to shift to the stock time after the RAM is cleared such as setting change. , It may be configured to shift to the stock time only after the start of the advantageous section after the AT or the bonus.

In the stock time, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a), (1), and (2), even if the CZ lottery is won, the game does not shift to the CZ state until the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has elapsed.
CZ is stocked (accumulated), a precursory effect is executed for a certain period (in this example, a period of 5 games) from the game that won the CZ lottery, and the CZ lottery is won in the final game of the certain period. We will announce the winning of CZ, which suggests that.

In this example, even if the CZ lottery is won in the stock time, the game does not shift to the CZ state until the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has elapsed. Therefore, the CZ lottery is won at the timing when the CZ lottery is won. The period (number of games) from the time to the transition to the CZ state is different.

On the other hand, in the normal stage, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (1), when the CZ lottery is won,
From the game that won the CZ lottery, the precursory effect is executed for a certain period (in this example, the period of 5 games), and in the final game of the certain period, the CZ winning notification suggesting that the CZ lottery was won is issued. After that, the game immediately shifts to the CZ state (weak CZ state) from the next game of the precursory effect. Therefore, in the normal stage, the period (number of games) from winning the CZ lottery to shifting to the CZ state is the same regardless of the timing of winning the CZ lottery.

In stock time, when the specified number of stock time games (50 games) has elapsed, C
If Z is not stocked, the stage shifts to the normal stage, and if CZ is stocked, the stage shifts to one of the weak CZ state, the strong CZ state, and the AT confirmed CZ state among the CZ states. ..

In this example, if one CZ is stocked, for example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (1), by the time the specified number of stock time games (50 games) has elapsed, the weak CZ state is set. For example, as shown in FIGS. 20 (a) and 20 (2), when two CZs are stocked, the state shifts to a strong CZ state, and when three or more CZs are stocked, the transition is performed. It shifts to the AT confirmed CZ state. That is, when a plurality of CZs are stocked in the stock time, the state shifts to a strong CZ state or an AT confirmed CZ state which is more advantageous to the player than the weak CZ state.

According to this example, it provides a new playability of how many times the CZ lottery is won (how many times a certain condition is satisfied) by the end of the stock time specified number of games (first period). It is possible to improve the interest of the game. Further, even after winning the CZ lottery (after a certain condition is satisfied), the sense of expectation can be maintained without impairing the playability.
In addition, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high, and by winning the CZ lottery twice or more during the stock time specified number of games (first period) (a certain condition is satisfied as the second number). (By that), a strong CZ state (fourth game state) that is more advantageous than a weak CZ state (third game state)
And AT confirmed CZ state (fourth game state), so that the player's expectation can be moderately fueled.

Further, when the AT lottery is won in the CZ state shifted from the stock time, or when the stock time is shifted to the AT confirmed CZ, the game shifts to the AT game after the end of the CZ state.

If three or more CZs are stocked in the stock time (when the AT game is confirmed), A immediately after the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has elapsed.
It may be configured to shift to the T-determined CZ state. Also, in stock time, CZ
If an AT lottery (a lottery with a lower winning probability than the CZ lottery) is performed in addition to the lottery and the AT lottery is won, the game immediately shifts to the AT state even before the stock time specified number of games (50 games) has elapsed. It may be configured as follows.

Also, in the final game of stock time, CZ regardless of whether CZ is in stock or not.
You may perform a judge effect as to whether or not to shift to the state, or at the stock time, A
Execute an AT lottery in which the right (AT) to shift to the T state can be acquired, and replace (or or) the CZ.
In addition), AT may be stocked, and in this case, the effect state to be transferred after the stock time may be determined according to the stock number of AT (and / or CZ).

<Example of production at stock time>
Next, an example of production in stock time will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 shows
It is a figure which showed the production example in the stock time in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 21A is a state in which the number of remaining games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 48 games.

In the same state, a background image for stock time (in this example, an image of the night sky including the moon) suggesting that the effect state is stock time is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the stock time (low). The number of remaining games (48G in this example) in the probability mode) is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 21B is a state in which the number of remaining games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 47 games, and the CZ lottery is won.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (47G in this example) are continuously displayed, and since the CZ lottery was won, the CZ lottery was won. We have started a precursory production that suggests.

The mode of the precursory effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, the confrontation effect showing how the main character confronts the enemy samurai is performed for a certain period from the game in which the CZ lottery is won (in this example, 5 games). Execute over a period).

Specifically, in the precursory effect of the first game shown in FIG. 21 (b), a character string of "confrontation!", Which suggests that the confrontation effect has started, is displayed, and is shown in the following figure (c). In the precursory production of the second game, the character image of the palace and the character string "It's a game!" Are displayed, and the following figure (d)
In the precursory effect of the third game shown in (1), the character image of the lord and the samurai is displayed, and in the precursory effect of the fourth game shown in the following figure (e), the confrontation scene between the lord and the enemy is displayed. 5 shown in f)
In the precursory effect of the game, a victory scene in which the lord wins the enemy and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including the character string "CZ acquisition!") Notifying that the CZ lottery has been won are displayed.

In this example, when the CZ lottery is won, the precursory effect is performed and the CZ winning notification is performed. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, the CZ winning notification is not performed in the precursory effect. In some cases, it may be decided by lottery whether or not to notify the CZ winning. In addition, there may be cases where the precursory effect is not performed. Further, at least a part of the effect before the CZ winning notification (for example, the background image for stock time) and the effect after the CZ winning notification may be different.

The state shown in FIG. 21 (g) is a state in which the number of remaining games in the stock time (low probability mode) is 46 games.

In the same state, the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (46G in this example) are continuously displayed, and one CZ is stocked by winning the CZ lottery. , CZ stock icon SI suggesting that CZ has been stocked is displayed.

In this example, the number of remaining games in the stock time is not subtracted during the precursory effect, but the number of remaining games may be subtracted even during the precursory effect. Further, even if the CZ lottery is won, the CZ stock icon SI may be configured not to be displayed, and in this case, the precursory effect may not be executed.

The state shown in FIG. 21 (h) is the state of the final game of the stock time (low probability mode), and the following state shown in FIG. 21 (i) is the state of shifting from the stock time (low probability mode) to the CZ state. Is.

In this example, since one CZ was stocked during the stock time (low probability mode), the CZ indicating that the weak CZ state was changed to the CZ state after the weak CZ state was changed.
A transition notification (in this example, an image including the display of the character string "CZ rush!") Is displayed, and a background image for weak CZ (in this example, the sea) suggesting that the staging state is a weak CZ state. Image of sandy beach) is displayed.

Further, in this example, an example of the effect in the stock time (low probability mode) is shown, but in the stock time (high probability mode), for example, the effect as shown in FIG. 21 (j) is performed.

In the production of stock time (high probability mode), the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) and the number of remaining games (48G in this example) are displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. In addition, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a plurality of background image HDs for high probability mode suggesting that the CZ lottery is in high probability mode (in this example, a plurality of "high accuracy" character strings are applied. A band-shaped image) is displayed.

The background image HD for the high probability mode is preferably displayed at a position that does not overlap with both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (a position separated from both ends by a predetermined distance), and the number of remaining games (this example). Then, it is preferable that the display of 48G) is overlapped in front of the background image HD for the high probability mode.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the high probability mode, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player in the stock time (first period). In addition to being able to make the background image HD for the high probability mode stand out, the background image HD for the high probability mode does not hinder the visibility of other images (display of the number of remaining games, etc.).

<Example of production on a normal stage>
Next, an example of the production in the normal stage will be described with reference to FIG. 22. FIG. 22 is a diagram showing an example of an effect on a normal stage in chronological order.

The state shown in FIG. 22A is a normal stage (low probability mode) state. In the same state, a background image for a normal stage (in this example, an image inside the castle) suggesting that the effect state is the normal stage is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

The state shown in FIG. 22B is a normal stage (low probability mode) state, and is a state in which the CZ lottery is won.

In the same state, the background image for the normal stage (image inside the castle) is continuously displayed and the CZ is displayed.
Since he won the lottery, he has started a precursory production that suggests that he won the CZ lottery.

The mode of the precursory effect is not particularly limited, but in this example, as in the stock time, a confrontation effect showing how the main character confronts the enemy samurai is performed for a certain period from the game in which the CZ lottery is won (book). In the example, it is executed over a period of 5 games).

Specifically, in the precursory effect of the first game shown in FIG. 22 (b), a character string of "confrontation!", Which suggests that the confrontation effect has started, is displayed, and is shown in the following figure (c). In the precursory production of the second game, the character image of the palace and the character string "It's a game!" Are displayed, and the following figure (d)
In the precursory effect of the third game shown in (1), the character image of the lord and the samurai is displayed, and in the precursory effect of the fourth game shown in the following figure (e), the confrontation scene between the lord and the enemy is displayed. 5 shown in f)
In the precursory effect of the game, a victory scene in which the lord wins the enemy and a CZ winning notification (in this example, an image including the character string "CZ acquisition!") Notifying that the CZ lottery has been won are displayed.

In addition, when two CZs were stocked in the stock time, it was configured to shift to the strong CZ state, but even in the normal stage, the CZ is produced in the precursory effect after the CZ is won.
If a lottery is held and the CZ lottery is won, the strong C will be the same as when two CZs are stocked.
It may be configured to shift to the Z state.

The state shown in FIG. 22 (g) is a state in which the normal stage (low probability mode) is shifted to the CZ state.

In this example, since the CZ lottery was won in the normal stage (low probability mode), the game immediately shifts to the CZ state (weak CZ state) from the next game of the precursory effect, and then shifts to the CZ state in the weak CZ state. A CZ transition notification (in this example, an image including the display of the character string "CZ rush!") Is displayed, and a background image for weak CZ (book) suggesting that the effect state is a weak CZ state. In the example, the image of the sea and the sandy beach) is displayed.

Further, in this example, an example of the effect in the normal stage (low probability mode) is shown, but in the normal stage (high probability mode), for example, the effect as shown in FIG. 22 (h) is performed.

In the production of the normal stage (high probability mode), in addition to displaying the background image for the normal stage (the image in the castle) in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, on both sides of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, A background image HD for a high-probability mode (in this example, a strip-shaped image to which a plurality of “high-probability” character strings are applied) suggesting that the CZ lottery is in the high-probability mode is displayed.

The background image HD for the high probability mode is preferably displayed at a position that does not overlap with both ends of the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157 (a position separated from both ends by a predetermined distance).

Further, in this example, the background image for the normal stage (image inside the castle) and the background image for stock time (image of the night sky including the moon) are different images, but they may be the same image, and in this case, they may be the same image.
Only the high-probability mode of the normal stage and the stock time may be the same image, and the low-probability mode of the normal stage and the stock time may be different images, or vice versa.

As described above, the game console according to the present embodiment (for example, the slot machine 1 shown in FIG. 1).
The 00 (pachinko machine) is a gaming table provided with control means (for example, a main control unit 300 and a first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 3) capable of setting one gaming state from a plurality of gaming states. The plurality of gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, the normal stage shown in FIG. 19) and a second gaming state (for example, shown in FIG. 19) that is more advantageous to the player than the first gaming state. The CZ state (CZ state, AT state) is included, and the control means is said to be based on the fact that a certain condition is satisfied (for example, winning the CZ lottery) in the state where the first gaming state is set. It is possible to set a second gaming state, and the control means is the first period (eg, 50 shown in FIG. 20 (a)).
Even if the certain condition is satisfied in the stock time of the game), the second gaming state is not set during the period of the first period, and the second game state is not set after the end of the first period. It is a game table characterized by setting the game state of.

According to the game console according to the present embodiment, even if a certain condition is satisfied, the game does not shift to the second game state until the end of the first period, so that the game is played for a long period of time in the first period. It can be enjoyed and the interest of the game can be improved.

Further, an operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) is provided, and the plurality of gaming states include a normal state (for example, a normal section shown in FIG. 19), the first gaming state, and the above. An advantageous state (for example, an advantageous section shown in FIG. 19) including a second gaming state is included.
The operation information (for example, operation navigation) of the operation means can be notified, and the advantageous state is
The state is more advantageous than the normal state with respect to the notification of the operation information, and when the normal state is changed to the advantageous state, the first period may be changed.

With such a configuration, when the state shifts to the advantageous state, the period shifts to the first period, so that the expectation from the previous advantageous state can be maintained and the normal state shifts to the advantageous state. , It is possible to avoid a situation in which too many balls are thrown out in a short time and the gambling becomes higher than necessary.

Further, the first period may be a period in which the certain conditions are more likely to be satisfied than the second period (a certain period excluding the first period).

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the first period as compared with the second period, and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player in the first period.

Further, the first period may include a normal period (for example, a low probability mode) and an advantageous period (for example, a high probability mode) in which the certain condition is more likely to be satisfied than the normal period. ..

With such a configuration, it is possible to have an expectation for an advantageous period (high probability mode) in the first period, and it is possible to increase the player's motivation to play in the first period. It should be noted that even in a certain period (second period) excluding the first period, there is a normal period (for example, a period in which the winning probability of the CZ lottery or the AT lottery is relatively low) and the above-mentioned period than the normal period. An advantageous period in which the conditions are likely to be satisfied (for example, a period in which the winning probability of the CZ lottery or the AT lottery is relatively high) may be included.

Further, at least a part of the effect mode is different between the effect executed in the normal period and the effect executed in the advantageous period (for example, in the high probability mode, FIG. 21J).
The background image HD for the high probability mode (displaying a band-shaped image to which a plurality of "highly accurate" character strings are applied) shown in the above may be used.

With such a configuration, it is possible to give a special feeling to the advantageous section (high probability mode), and it is possible to raise the expectation of the player in the first period.

Further, even if the certain condition is satisfied in the first period, the certain condition may be satisfied during the period of the first period after the certain condition is satisfied. You may.

With such a configuration, even if a certain condition is satisfied, the game state does not shift to the second gaming state until the end of the first period. Therefore, when a certain condition is satisfied at an early stage of the first period. Even so
It is possible to prevent the player from feeling injured, and it is possible to maintain the motivation to play.

Further, the second gaming state includes a third gaming state (for example, a weak CZ state) and a fourth gaming state (for example, a strong CZ state, AT confirmed CZ) which is more advantageous than the third gaming state. State) is included, and when the number of times the certain condition is satisfied in the first period is the first number (for example, once), the third gaming state is set after the end of the first period. When the number of times the certain condition is satisfied in the first period is the second number (for example, two or more times), the fourth gaming state is set after the end of the first period. It may be a thing.

With such a configuration, it is possible to provide a new game property of how many times a certain condition is satisfied by the end of the first period, and it is possible to improve the interest of the game. In addition, even after a certain condition is satisfied, the sense of expectation can be maintained without impairing the playability. In addition, it is possible to prevent the gambling from becoming too high, and when a certain condition is satisfied by the second number during the first period, the player shifts to the fourth gaming state, which is more advantageous than the third gaming state. Because it can be done, the player's expectation can be moderately fueled.

<< Embodiment 2 >>
Hereinafter, the game console (slot machine) according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 23. FIG. 23 shows
It is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 23 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention.
It includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. Inside the center of the main body 101 (not shown), three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) with multiple types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 1
10 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112 (FIG. 26).
reference). The symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 when viewed from the player.
Three symbols are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of the above, and a total of nine symbols can be seen.

Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment,
Although three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. note that,
Inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (also referred to as an index sensor, not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each of the reels 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a specific winning combination (specifically, in an internal lottery described later).
You have been internally elected to Special Role 1 or Special Role 2), or during a bonus game (Special Role 1)
・ It is a lamp that informs the player that the player is in the 2 game state. The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted.
The re-game lamp 122 informs the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for staging.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, two are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals.
When a predetermined number of medals are inserted, the game start lamp 121 for notifying that the game start operation is possible is lit.

The effect button 156 is an operation means that can be operated by the player. In this embodiment, the buttons are composed of buttons that can be pressed by the player, and are used for various effects. The operating means used for such an effect is not limited to the buttons, and may be configured by, for example, a lever, a touch panel, or the like, or may be provided with a plurality of operating means.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medal can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medal can be inserted (inserted operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 has various internal information (for example,
It is a display device for displaying the number of medals paid out during the bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize, and is also used as an instruction monitor for performing a push order effect. In this example, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7.
It was a segment (SEG) indicator.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141, or when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reel 11 is used.
0 to 112 will start the rotation. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with the reels 110 to 112. In addition, each stop button 137 to 13
A light emitting body may be provided inside the 9, and if the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is the first stop operation (hereinafter, also referred to as "1 stop" or "first stop"), and the next stop operation is the second stop. Operation (hereinafter, also referred to as "2 stop" or "2nd stop"), the last stop operation is the 3rd stop operation (hereinafter, also referred to as "2 stop")
Hereinafter, it is also referred to as "third stop" or "third stop". ).

Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order (or push order).

The operation order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is when the left stop button 137 is represented by "left or R", the middle stop button 138 is represented by "middle or C", and the right stop button 139 is represented by "right or R". , (1) Left → Middle → Right operation order (left middle right or LCR), (2)
Left->right-> middle operation order (left-right middle or LRC), (3) middle->left-> right operation order (middle left-right or CLR), (4) middle->right-> left operation order (middle right left or CRL) , (5) Right->left-> middle operation order (right-left middle or RLC), (6) Right->middle-> left operation order (right middle left or RLC)
).

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided. The sound hole 181 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game.
A staging device 160 is disposed on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is provided on the upper part of the staging device 160.

The effect device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (effect image) arranged behind the shutter 163. A display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (player side). It has become.

It should be noted that the display device may not be a liquid crystal display device but may be a display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

In addition, inside the main body 101, there are setting keys that can be switched on and off by rotation operation, operations for changing settings (setting value change operation) by pressing operations, and operations for confirming settings. There is a setting switch that can be used. The setting key is an operation means for starting the setting change and setting confirmation of the setting value (setting 1 to setting 6 in this example), and the setting switch is
It is one of the setting means that can set one of a plurality of setting values.

<Winning line>
Next, the winning line will be described with reference to FIG. 24. FIG. 24 shows the slot machine 10.
It is a figure which shows an example of the winning line of 0.

As described with reference to FIG. 23, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112 when viewed from the player. A total of nine symbols can be seen.

Specifically, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is the upper design of the left reel, and the middle stage of the left reel 110 (position 2 shown in the figure; symbol position). 2
The symbol displayed on the left reel is called the middle symbol on the left reel, and the symbol displayed on the lower symbol of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 3) is referred to as the lower symbol on the left reel.

Further, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the middle reel 111 (position of 4 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 4) is referred to as the middle reel upper stage symbol and the middle stage of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 5). The symbols displayed in) are the middle reel middle symbol and the lower reel 111 (position 6 in the figure;).
The symbol displayed at the symbol position 6) is called the lower reel symbol.

Further, the symbol displayed on the upper stage of the right reel 112 (position 7 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 7) is referred to as the upper symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed on the middle stage of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 8). The symbol displayed in) is the middle symbol on the right reel and the lower symbol on the right reel 112 (position 9 shown in the figure;
The symbol displayed at the symbol position 9) is called the lower symbol on the right reel.

In the present embodiment, as a winning line, a middle-stage winning line L1 (hereinafter, simply referred to as a symbol position 8) composed of a left reel middle-stage symbol (symbol position 2), a middle-reel middle-stage symbol (symbol position 5), and a right-reel middle-stage symbol (symbol position 8). It may be called "winning line L1").

Here, the winning line is a line set at the stop position of the symbol that can be visually recognized through the symbol display window 113, and the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination described with reference to FIGS. 27 and 28 is displayed. It is a line that determines whether or not it has been done (whether or not it has been aligned). The valid winning line (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as "valid line") is predetermined by the number of medals bet as a game medium.

The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a dedicated machine for betting three medals. When the number of inserted medals is less than three, no winning line is valid, and when three medals are bet, the winning line L1 Is enabled. When the winning line is activated, the start lever 135 can be operated to start the game.

Hereinafter, among the symbol display windows 113, the symbol positions 2, 5, and 8 on the winning line L1 are "winning positions", and the other symbol positions, that is, the symbol positions 1, 3, 4, 6, 7, and 9 are "non-". It may be called "winning position". That is, the winning position means a position on the winning line and where the symbols constituting the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination stop.

The number of winning lines is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the winning line L1, the upper winning line composed of the left reel upper symbol, the middle reel upper symbol and the right reel upper symbol, the left reel lower symbol, the middle reel lower symbol and the right reel lower symbol are composed. A total of three lower winning lines may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines according to the number of medals bet may be set as valid winning lines.

<Control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. 25. The figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game.
And, according to the command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 that controls the main effect and the first sub-control unit 400 transmit. It is composed of a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on commands.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300
A basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300 is provided, and the basic circuit 302 stores the CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used during the internal lottery of the winning combination, a reel stop position, and the like. ROM 306 and R for temporarily storing data
It is equipped with AM308, I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and WDT (watchdog timer) 314. Other storage devices may be used for ROM 306 and RAM 308.
This point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later.

The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. CPU304
Uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. for example,
When the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz = 1. It becomes .504 ms.

The main control unit 300 receives 0 to 6 each time the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315a is received.
A random number value generation circuit 316 that derives numerical values in the range of 5535 (assuming that this circuit has two built-in random number value generation circuits) and a start signal (reset signal) are output when the power is turned on. The start signal output circuit 338 is provided, and the CPU 304 is the start signal output circuit 3.
When the start signal is input from 38, the game control is started (the main process of the main control unit described later is started).

The random number value generation circuit 316 generates a random number value used in the basic circuit 302. The random number value generation in the random number value generation circuit 316 can be roughly divided into two modes: counter mode and random number mode.
There are different ways. In the counter mode, a numerical value that counts up (down) at a predetermined time interval is acquired, and the numerical value is derived as a random value. There are two more methods for random number mode. The first method in the random number mode is to perform an operation by a predetermined function (for example, a modulus function) using a seed of a random number value, and derive this operation result as a random number value. The second method reads a numerical value from a random number table in which numerical values in the range of 0 to 65535 are randomly arranged, and derives the read numerical value as a random number value. In the random number value generation circuit 316, irregular values are acquired by using white noise superimposed on signals input from various sensors 318 to the sensor circuit 320. The random number value generation circuit 316 uses the value thus acquired as an initial value of a counter for counting up (down) in the counter mode, as a seed of a random number value, or when determining a read start position of a random number table. Use.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is input from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 13
8 sensors, stop button 139 sensors, checkout button 134 sensors, medal payout device 18
Medal payout sensor for medals paid out from 0, optical sensor for reel 110, reel 1
11 optical sensors, reel 112 optical sensors, etc.) are monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. Stop button 137 sensor,
The stop button 138 sensor and the stop button 139 are installed on the respective stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

Bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, and bet button 132
The sensor is installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and the RAM 30
The insertion operation when the medals electronically stored in 8 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game is detected. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The optical sensor of the reel 110, the optical sensor of the reel 111, and the optical sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and a light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do, it becomes L level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided in the reel devices 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. The drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129 are game start lamp 121, storage number display. Device 125, game information display 126, payout number display device 127
) Is provided.

Further, an information output circuit 334 (external centralized terminal plate 248) is connected to the basic circuit 302, and an external hall computer (not shown) or the like is connected to the main control unit 300 via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the slot machine 100 is output to the information input circuit 652 provided.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply management unit (not shown) to the main control unit 300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 is the voltage of the power supply. When the value is less than a predetermined value (9v in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is the first.
Although it is configured so that signals such as commands can be transmitted to the sub-control unit 400, the first sub-control unit 4
From 00, it is configured so that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. 1st sub-control unit 4
00 receives the control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via the input interface, and receives the control command.
A basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command is provided, and the basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404 and RA for temporarily storing data.
It is equipped with an M408, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 is
It operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and the sound source IC 418 is provided with speakers 272 and 277 via an output interface. Sound source IC418 is CP
The sound output from the amplifier and the speaker 272 and 277 is controlled in response to the command from the U404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier to be amplified by the speaker 27.
Output from 2,277.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 14) are provided in the drive circuit 422 via an input / output interface.
4. Title panel 162 lamp, etc.) is connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the motor of the shutter 163, and the drive circuit 424 is provided with the shutter 163 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and the sensor circuit 426 is a shutter sensor 4 capable of detecting the position of the shutter 163 via an input interface.
28 and the effect button sensor 430 that can detect the pressing operation of the effect button 156 are connected. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 and the effect button sensor 430 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 is a staging image display device 157 (hereinafter, “liquid crystal display device 15”).
Also called "7". ), And various controls of the staging device 160 including the display control of) are performed. The second sub-control unit 500 is, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the liquid crystal display device 157 and a control unit that controls various staging drive devices (for example, a control unit that controls the motor drive of the shutter 163). It may be configured by a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, and an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices.
And a counter timer 512 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are installed. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the staging image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
Next, the symbol arrangement applied to each of the above-mentioned reels 110 to 112 will be described with reference to FIG. 26. In addition, FIG. 26 shows each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 11).
It is a figure which developed and showed the arrangement of the design applied to 2) in a plane.

On each reel 110 to 112, a plurality of types (9 types in this embodiment) of symbols shown on the right side of the figure are arranged in a predetermined number of frames (20 frames of numbers 0 to 19 in this embodiment). .. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112. For example, in the present embodiment, the frame number 0 of the left reel 110 is "
The "watermelon symbol", the "bell symbol" is arranged in the number 1 frame of the middle reel 111, and the "replay symbol" is arranged in the number 0 frame of the right reel 112.

<Types of winning roles>
Next, the types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 27. In addition, FIG. 27 shows the type of winning combination, the name of the conditional device, the combination of symbols corresponding to each winning combination, the number of payouts, and the number of payouts.
It is a figure which shows the remarks.

The winning combination of the slot machine 100 includes a special role (special role 1, special role 2), a general role (replay game role 1 to 3, small role 1 to small role 5), and the like. The types of winning combinations are not limited to these combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted. In FIG. 27, some of the winning combinations are omitted.

<Types of winning roles / special roles>
Among the winning combinations in the present embodiment, the special combination 1 and the special combination 2 are roles for shifting to a special gaming state in which a predetermined benefit is given to the player. Further, the re-gaming role is a role in which the re-gaming is possible without inserting a new medal (a role in which the re-game is given). These prize winners are "
Sometimes called "actor".

Further, the "winning" in the present embodiment includes the case where the symbol combination of the operating combination without the distribution of the medal (without the payout of the medal) is displayed on the winning line, for example, the special combination 1, Includes winnings for special role 2 and replaying role.

In the special role 1 and the special role 2, the game state is the special role 1 and 2 internal winning state (R) due to the internal winning.
It is a winning role that shifts to T3) and the gaming state shifts to the special role 1 and 2 gaming state (RT4) by winning a prize. In addition, in the special role 1 and 2 game state (RT4), the specified number of sheets (for example, 200 sheets)
When medals exceeding the above are paid out, the gaming state shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1).
The game states (RT1 to RT4) will be described later.

The symbol combination corresponding to the special role 1 (BB) is "Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1 symbol-Seven 1".
"Design" or "Seven 2 design-Seven 2 design-Seven 2 design", special role 2 (RB)
The symbol combination corresponding to is "BAR symbol-BAR symbol-BAR symbol".

When the special combination 1 or the special combination 2 is internally won, the special combination internal winning flag corresponding to the internally won combination is set to ON (stored in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300). This flag remains on until the internally won combination is won, and it becomes easy to win the internally won combination in the next and subsequent games. That is, in the game in which the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, even if the special role is not won, the special role will be internally won in the next and subsequent games, and the symbol combination corresponding to the special role will be. It will be easy to win a prize.

<Types of winning roles / replaying roles>
The replaying roles 1 to 3 are winning roles (actuating roles) that allow the game to be played without inserting medals (game media) in the next game by winning, and the medals are not paid out. The corresponding symbol combinations are as shown in FIG. 27. The re-gaming role may be any role as long as the player can play the next game without inserting a medal. Therefore, for example, when a prize is won in the re-game combination, medals may be automatically inserted in the next game (the number of medals inserted may be reset in the medal insertion number storage area), or the re-game combination may be won. The medals inserted in the game may be carried over to the next game and used as they are.

<Types of winning roles / small roles>
Small winning combination 1 to small winning combination 5 are winning combinations in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out (there is a number of payouts).

The small winning combination 1 (watermelon) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol-watermelon symbol" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 and five medals are paid out.

The small winning combination 2 (cherry) is a winning combination in which the symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 and two medals are paid out. note that,"
The symbol combination of "cherry symbol-ANY-ANY" may be any symbol as long as the symbol of the left reel 110 is "cherry symbol", and the symbols of the middle reel 111 and the right reel 112 may be any symbol.

Hereinafter, these small roles 1 (watermelon) and small roles 2 (cherries) may be collectively referred to as "rare roles", but the rare roles are not limited to these winning roles, and will eventually be used. One of the winning combinations may be used, or the other winning combination may be added.

<U> In addition, if you win the rare role in the AT state described later, you can add the number of games or set </ U>
It is designed so that a lottery to add the number of <U> to the lottery is executed (it is easy to win the lottery). One </ U>
<U> On the other hand, even if you win the rare role in the ED state, you can add the number of games or the number of sets </ U>
The lottery to do <U> is not executed. </ U>
<U></U> As shown in FIG. 28, the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is composed of six types of winning combinations, the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f. In this example, by lottery, with a predetermined probability (about 1/6 in this example, common to all settings).
When the winning combination of any of the small winning combination 3a to 3f is internally won, and the operation order (pressing order) of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139 matches the correct answer pressing order corresponding to the internally winning winning combination. 12 medals will be paid out (details will be described later with reference to FIG. 28).

In the small winning combination 4 (common bell), the symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is on the winning line L1 regardless of the operation order (pressing order) and operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. It is a winning combination that is displayed as stopped and 12 medals are paid out.

In the small winning combination 5 (single winning combination), the winning line L1 is a combination of "replay symbol-replay symbol-blank 1 symbol" regardless of the operation order (pushing order) and operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. It is a winning combination that is stopped and displayed above and one medal is paid out.

<Small role 3 (Oshijun bell) and AT game>
Next, the relationship between the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) and the AT game will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (b).

Note that FIG. 28 (a) is a diagram showing symbol combinations, payout numbers, and remarks corresponding to the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) and the small winning combination 5 (single piece combination), and FIG. 28 (b) is a diagram showing small winning combinations. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the push order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in the game which was internally elected to the combination 3 (push order bell), and the AT game.

Small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) includes small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell LCR), small winning combination 3b (pushing order bell RLC),
Small role 3c (push order bell CRL), small role 3d (push order bell LRC), small role 3e (push order bell CLR)
), Small role 3f (Oshijun Bell RCL) consists of 6 types of winning roles.

When the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won, which symbol combination is stopped and displayed on the winning line L1 according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139.
Then, it is decided whether the AT game becomes advantageous or disadvantageous.

Details will be described later, but in this example, among the six types of push order bells from small win 3a to small win 3f, small win 3b (push order bell RLC), small win 3c (push order bell CRL), and small win 3e (Oshijun Bell CLR),
In the four types of small winning combination 3f (pushing order bell RCL), 12 medals are paid out when the stop operation is performed according to the irregular push which is the correct answer operation order. For this reason, if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the irregular push, there is a 4/6 chance that the small winning combination (pushing order bell) will be won.
The game in which the stop operation is performed according to the irregular push is a "high base game" in which the number of medals won is relatively large.

On the other hand, in this example, among the six types of push order bells of the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f, the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell LCR) is stopped according to the forward pressing, which is the correct operation order. Twelve medals are paid out, and when the small winning combination 3d (pushing order bell LRC) is stopped according to the scissors striking, which is the correct operation order, twelve medals are paid out. For this reason, if the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the forward pushing or scissors striking, 2 /
There is a probability of 6 that a small winning combination (pushing order bell) will be won, and the game in which the stop operation is performed according to the forward pushing or scissors striking is a "low base game" in which the number of medals won is relatively small.

Hereinafter, the six types of small winning combination 3a to small winning combination 3f will be specifically described.

<Small role 3a (Oshijun Bell LCR)>
Of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell), when the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell LCR) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct answer operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR)). for,"
The symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and AT games are advantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell LCR) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, the predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, scissors striking (LRC)) is followed. When the stop operation is performed, a symbol combination other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3a (pushing order bell LCR) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, an irregular push (CLR, CRL,).
When the stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and AT game is disadvantageous. Will be.

Here, "the AT game becomes disadvantageous" means "the ease of acquiring the game value in the AT game is disadvantageous by the player", for example, in the normal game, the stop operation is performed by an irregular push. In the game, the AT lottery is not executed, the number of games in one set of AT games is reduced, the initial number of games at the time of AT winning and the probability of addition are disadvantageous depending on the number of irregular pushes, and each game point lottery is performed. , The point lottery becomes disadvantageous when an irregular push is made on the game table that determines the AT performance according to the point. In a normal game, the probability of winning the AT lottery is lowered in a game in which the stop operation is performed by the irregular push. , The frequency of execution of the operation navigation in the AT game is lowered, the set continuous lottery is not executed in the AT game, the winning probability of the set continuous lottery is lowered in the AT game, and the like. On the other hand, "the AT game becomes advantageous" means "the ease of acquiring the game value in the AT game is made advantageous by the player".

As described above, in this example, if the small winning combination 3 is internally won, the AT game becomes advantageous if the forward push (LCR) or the scissors strike (LRC) is performed, and the irregular push is performed when the small winning combination 3 is internally won. (C
(Any of LR, CRL, RLC, RCL) was made to be disadvantageous for AT games, but the present invention is not limited to this, and for example, when the small winning combination 3 is internally won, it is pushed forward (LCR).
) Or scissors striking (LRC) does not change the advantage of the AT game, and if an irregular push (either CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL) is performed when the small winning combination 3 is internally won, the AT game is disadvantageous. If you win the small role 3 internally, you can push forward (LCR) or scissors (LRC) to gain an advantage in AT games, and if you win the small role 3 internally, you can push irregularly. ((
When CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL) is performed, the advantage of the AT game may not change.

<Small role 3b (Oshijun Bell RLC)>
Of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell), when the small winning combination 3b (pushing order bell RLC) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct answer operation order (in this example, irregular push (RLC)). for,
The symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and AT games are disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3b (pushing order bell RLC) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors). When the stop operation is performed according to the striking (LRC)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3b (pushing order bell RLC) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, an irregular push (CLR, CRL,).
When the stop operation is performed according to any of RCL)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. ..

<Small role 3c (Oshijun Bell CRL)>
When the small winning combination 3c (pushing order bell CRL) is internally won among the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell) and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (in this example, the irregular push (CRL)). for,
The symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and AT games are disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3c (pushing order bell CRL) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors). When the stop operation is performed according to the striking (LRC)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3c (pushing order bell CRL) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, an irregular push (CLR, RLC,).
When the stop operation is performed according to any of RCL)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. ..

<Small role 3d (Oshijun Bell LRC)>
When the small winning combination 3d (pushing order bell LRC) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (in this example, scissors striking (LRC)). The symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3d (pushing order bell LRC) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, the predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR)) is followed. When the stop operation is performed, a symbol combination other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3d (pushing order bell LRC) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, an irregular push (CLR, CRL,).
When the stop operation is performed according to either RLC or RCL)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and AT game is disadvantageous. Will be.

<Small role 3e (Oshijun Bell CLR)>
When the small winning combination 3e (pushing order bell CLR) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the predetermined correct answer operation order (in this example, the irregular pressing (CLR)). for,
The symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and AT games are disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3e (pushing order bell CLR) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors). When the stop operation is performed according to the striking (LRC)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3e (pushing order bell CLR) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, an irregular push (CRL, RLC,).
When the stop operation is performed according to any of RCL)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. ..

<Small role 3f (Oshijun Bell RCL)>
Of the small winning combination 3 (pushing order bell), when the small winning combination 3f (pushing order bell RCL) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined correct answer operation order (in this example, irregular push (RCL)). for,
The symbol combination of "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" is stopped and displayed, 12 medals are paid out, and AT games are disadvantageous.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 3f (pushing order bell RCL) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, forward push (LCR) or scissors). When the stop operation is performed according to the striking (LRC)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game becomes advantageous.

In addition, the small winning combination 3f (pushing order bell RCL) is internally won, and among a plurality of incorrect answer operation orders other than the correct answer operation order, a predetermined incorrect answer operation order (in this example, an irregular push (CRL, CLR,).
When the stop operation is performed according to any of RLC)), the symbol combinations other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol" are stopped and displayed, one medal is paid out, and the AT game is disadvantageous. ..

In this example, if the small winning combination 3a to the small winning combination 3f are internally won and the stop operation is performed in the incorrect answer operation order, one medal is paid out, but the number of payouts is. The number of cards is not limited to one, and may be 0, or may be 1 or more as long as it is less than 12 that are paid out when the stop operation is performed in the correct operation order.

<Small role 5 (1 piece role)>
Next, the relationship between the small combination 5 (single combination) and the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIGS. 28 (a) and 28 (c).

Note that FIG. 28 (a) is a diagram showing a symbol combination, a number of payouts, and remarks corresponding to the small combination 3 (pushing order bell) and the small combination 5 (single combination), and FIG. 28 (c) is a small combination. It is a figure which shows the relationship between the push order of the stop buttons 137 to 139 in the game which internally won the combination 5 (one piece combination), and the setting suggestion effect A.

If the small winning combination 5 (1 piece combination) is internally won, the small combination 5 (1 piece combination) will be won regardless of the operation order (pressing order) or operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. One medal is paid out, and it is determined whether or not the setting suggestion effect A can be executed according to the operation order of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139.

As a specific example, when the small winning combination 5 (single winning combination) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors striking (LRC)). for,
One medal is paid out by winning the small role 5 (one piece combination), and the setting suggestion effect A becomes feasible.

On the other hand, the small winning combination 5 (single winning combination) is internally won, and the stop operation is performed according to an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, an irregular push (either CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL)). In that case, one medal is paid out by winning the small winning combination 5 (one winning combination), but the setting suggestion effect A is not executed.

In this example, when the small winning combination 5 (single winning combination) is internally won and the stop operation is performed according to the irregular push, the setting suggestion effect A becomes infeasible. When 5 (1 card combination) is internally won, the operation navigation is displayed and the stop operation that does not follow the operation navigation is performed (
When the stop operation is performed ignoring the operation navigation), the setting suggestion effect A may be configured to be in an unexecutable state.

Further, in this example, when the small winning combination 5 is internally won and the stop operation is performed by an irregular push, one medal is paid out, but the number of payouts is not limited to one. It may be 0 sheets.

Here, the setting suggestion effect is an effect that suggests the setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example) currently set by using the effect element in the slot machine 100, and the setting suggestion described later. The effect A and the setting suggestion effect B are one of the setting suggestion effects.

The staging element used for the setting suggestion staging is not particularly limited, but for example, a display means (for example,
The display by the liquid crystal display device 157) shown in FIG. 23, the sound output from the sound output means (for example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25), and the optical output means (for example, the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23). Light output from a backlight, a lamp such as a side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 23, or movement (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion / contraction, vertical movement) of a movable body (for example, a shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 23). ) Etc. are applicable.

In this example, when the stop operation is performed in an operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, an irregular push), the setting suggestion effect A becomes infeasible. However, the present invention is not limited to this, for example, a predetermined operation sequence (in this example, forward push (LCR)).
, Or the setting suggestion effect A may be executed less frequently than when the stop operation is performed according to the scissors striking (LRC).

In addition, a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors striking (in this example)
The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is the same as when the stop operation is performed according to LRC)), but the setting suggestion effect includes an effect that deterministically suggests the set value (for example, "setting 5 confirmed"). The execution frequency of the effect (effect) becomes low (the effect that vaguely suggests the set value (for example, "setting 5")
?? Setting 6? The execution frequency of the effect) including the display such as "is high).

In addition, a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors striking (in this example)
The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect A may be lower than that when the stop operation is performed according to the LRC)), and the execution frequency of the effect that deterministically suggests the set value may also be lower.

<Types of RT-type game states>
Next, the types and transitions of the RT-type gaming states in the slot machine 100 will be described.

<Replay low probability state (RT1)>
The re-game low probability state (RT1) is a default RT-type game state (hereinafter, also referred to as “normal game state”) that is initially set immediately after the power of the slot machine 100 is turned on.
This is a gaming state that is relatively disadvantageous to the player compared to other gaming states.

In this example, in this replay low probability state (RT1), the replay combination 2 (promotion replay 1)
Or, if you win the replay role 3 (promotion replay 2), the replay high probability state (R) described later
Move to T2). Further, in this re-game low probability state (RT1), when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the state shifts to the special role 1 and 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Replay high probability state (RT2)>
The re-game high probability state is a game state in which the internal winning probability of the re-game is higher than that of the re-game low probability state (RT1).

In this example, in this re-game high probability state (RT2), when the special role 1 or the special role 2 is internally won, the game shifts to the special role 1 and 2 internal winning state (RT3) described later.

<Special role 1 and 2 internal winning state (RT3)>
The special role 1 and 2 internal winning state (RT3) is a state in which the internal winning flag corresponding to the special role 1 or the special role 2 is set to ON, and the player performs a stop operation at a predetermined timing. It is a gaming state in which the symbol combination corresponding to the special role corresponding to this flag can be displayed.

In this example, in the special winning combination 1 and 2 internal winning state (RT3), when the special winning combination 1 or the special winning combination 2 is won, the game shifts to the special gaming state (RT4) described later.

<Special game state (RT4)>
The special gaming state (RT4) is the most advantageous gaming state among all the gaming states.
In this example, in the special gaming state (RT4), when a predetermined number (for example, 200) is paid out, the game shifts to the replay low probability state (RT1).

In this example, the end condition of the special gaming state (RT4) is not particularly limited, and for example, when a predetermined combination is internally won, when a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) is won, or when a predetermined number of times (for example, 8 times) is won. It may be the case that the game is played a number of times (for example, 6 times).

<Transition of AT-based game state>
Next, the game state of the AT system will be described.

The AT-type game state is roughly divided into a low navigation state and a high navigation state. The low navigation state is a state in which the probability that the operation navigation is executed is low, and is also referred to as a normal mode, a non-advantageous section, or a normal section. The high navigation state is a state in which the operation navigation is more likely to be executed than the low navigation state.
Also called AT mode, advantageous section.

Here, the operation navigation refers to an effect of notifying the stop operation mode of the stop buttons 137 to 139 (for example, the correct answer operation order and the timing of the stop operation) in order to obtain a medal and maintain an advantageous gaming state, for example. , An effect of notifying the correct operation order of the push order combination (for example, the small combination 3 (push order bell LCR)) (for example, an effect of displaying the characters "left → middle → right") and the like.

The high navigation state is more advantageous to the player than the low navigation state because the stop operation according to the operation content of the operation navigation brings a favorable result to the player. Here, the advantage is specifically the total number of game media paid out by the game console with respect to the total number of game media used by the player as the number of bets when the game is played for a predetermined period. The ratio, the so-called payout rate (ball payout rate), is advantageous.

In this example, the low navigation state is the state where the execution probability of the operation navigation is low, and the high navigation state is the state where the execution probability of the operation navigation is higher than the low navigation state. The state in which the operation navigation is not executed or the high navigation state may be set as the state in which the operation navigation is executed.

Each game state of the AT system is subdivided and managed, and this is called a staging state. Specifically, the production state in the low navigation state is the normal game state, and the production state in the high navigation state is the normal state.
It has a confirmed notification state, a judge state, a pullback state, an AT1 state, an AT2 state, and an ED (ending) state. The AT1 state, the AT2 state, and the ED state are, in principle, states in which the number of balls to be ejected increases.

In the present embodiment, when a certain condition is satisfied in the normal gaming state in the low navigation state (for example, when a winning combination other than loss is won), the game shifts to the normal state in the high navigation state. After that, for example, the route shifts from the finalized notification state to the AT1 state to the judge state in this order, and from this judge state to the normal gaming state or the AT2 state via the pullback state, or the AT2 directly from the judge state. There is a route to shift to the state.

The AT state (AT1 state, AT2 state) is a predetermined number of times (for example, 30 games per set).
This is a state in which the AT game is possible, which is more advantageous for the player than the normal game state in the low navigation state and the normal state in the high navigation state.

In this AT game, a set continuous lottery for whether or not to continue the AT game (for example, a lottery with a winning probability of 1/4) is executed at the start game of the AT game, and if the set continuous lottery is won, a predetermined number of times are further executed. (In this example, one set of 30 games) is given, and the AT state is extended. Further, when the condition for shifting to the normal gaming state is satisfied in the AT state (in this example, when all the games in the AT state are digested), the game shifts to the normal gaming state from the next game.

Further, when the number of remaining games in the high navigation state becomes less than a predetermined number of games (for example, 20 games), the game shifts to the ED state, and in this ED state, an ED (ending) effect suggesting the end of the high navigation state is executed. To.

The condition for shifting to the ED state is that the remaining games in the high navigation state have a predetermined number of games (for example,).
It is not limited to 20 games) or less, and for example, the predetermined number of games may be 20 games or more or less, or may be "the number of acquired games + the number of planned acquisition differences>2000".

<Setting suggestion production A>
Next, the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 29. FIG. 29A is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A.

In this example, in the advantageous section, the small winning combination 5 (1 piece combination) is internally won by the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on), and the operation order is predetermined (in this example, the forward pressing is performed). When the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by (LCR) or scissors striking (LRC)), the setting suggestion effect A using the setting suggestion effect A selection table described later is used.
By executing the lottery, the setting suggestion effect A becomes executable.

Further, when it is determined by the setting suggestion effect A lottery to execute the setting suggestion effect A, the suggestion effect suggesting that the setting suggestion effect A is executed is executed in the game in which the lottery is executed.

On the other hand, in the advantageous section, the small winning combination 5 (single winning combination) is internally won by the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on), and the operation order other than the predetermined operation order (in this example, in this example). Irregular push (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)) Stop button 13
When the stop operations 7 to 139 are performed, the setting suggestion effect A lottery is not executed. Therefore, neither the setting suggestion effect A nor the suggestion effect suggesting that the setting suggestion effect A is executed is executed.

In this example, the small winning combination 5 (single winning combination) is internally won, and the stop button 137 is performed in a predetermined operation order (in this example, forward pressing (LCR) or scissors striking (LRC)). ~
An example of executing the setting suggestion effect A lottery when the stop operation of 139 is performed is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the winning combination other than the small combination 5 (1 piece combination) is internally won and , It may be executed when the stop operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are performed in a predetermined operation order.
It may be executed when a predetermined winning combination (for example, when a single winning combination is won) is won regardless of the stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, or the stop buttons 137 to 139 may be executed.
When a predetermined number of medals are paid out regardless of the stop operation of (for example, 1 by irregular pressing)
It may be executed when (for example, when one medal is paid out).

In addition, the small role 5 (1 piece role) is internally won and pushed forward (LCR) or scissors hit (LR).
When the stop operation is performed in C), one medal is paid out and the small winning combination 5 is internally won. When the stop operation is performed by an irregular push, the medal is not paid out. It may be decided whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect A lottery depending on the number of payouts.

That is, the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect A lottery may be that the small winning combination 5 (one winning combination) is internally won and one medal is paid out.

There are two types of the setting suggestion effect A lottery in this example, a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect A is higher than this low probability mode.

The start conditions of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example, FIG. 29 (a).
), When the transition from the low navigation state (normal section) to the high navigation state (advantageous section), a high probability mode of a predetermined number of games (10 games in this example) is set. Then, in this high probability mode, the predetermined number of games (1 in this example) without executing the setting suggestion effect A.
When 0 game) has elapsed, the mode shifts to the low probability mode from the next game. On the other hand, in the high probability mode, if the setting suggestion effect A is executed before the predetermined number of games (10 games) has elapsed (in this example, the eighth game), the setting suggestion effect A is executed. Move to low probability mode from the next game.

Conventionally, when the AT state or ED state ends, the high navigation state (advantageous section) immediately shifts to the high navigation state (advantageous section) via the low navigation state (normal section), so that the low navigation state (normal section) Many players end the game immediately (immediately disappoint) when shifting from the low navigation state (advantageous section) to the high navigation state (advantageous section), but according to this example, the low navigation state (normal section) is changed to the high navigation state (normal section). Advantageous section)
By providing a high-probability mode period in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is high, which is different from the low-probability mode period, the low-navigation state (normal section) shifts to the high-navigation state (advantageous section). When this happens, it is possible to make it difficult to end the game immediately (immediately disappoint), and it is possible to improve the operating rate.

The conditions for setting the high-probability mode are not particularly limited. For example, if the player loses in the confrontation production, the high-probability mode may be set, or the CZ or the precursory production fails (winning a bonus or AT). If not), a high-probability mode may be set, a high-probability mode may be set if a predetermined winning combination is won, or a high-probability mode may be set if a lottery is won. You may.

<Setting suggestion effect A selection table>
FIG. 29B is a diagram showing an example of the setting suggestion effect A selection table used in the setting suggestion effect A lottery.

The setting suggestion effect A lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect A, and if so, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect A. In this example, the setting suggestion effect A by the lottery.
If it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect A, the setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game after the suggestion effect suggesting that the setting suggestion effect A is executed is executed in the game in which the lottery is executed. ..

The game for executing the setting suggestion effect A is not limited to the next game of the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed, and may be a game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed, or after the next game. It may be a game of. Further, the game that executes the suggestion effect suggesting that the setting suggestion effect A is executed is not limited to the game in which the setting suggestion effect A lottery is executed, and may be any game before the setting suggestion effect A is executed.

Of the "effect contents" in the setting suggestion effect A selection table shown in FIG. 29 (b), "no execution" indicates that the setting suggestion effect A is not executed, and the other effect contents indicate the setting suggestion to be executed. The production content of the production A is shown.

In the setting suggestion effect A, among the plurality of types of effect elements, the display by the display means (in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23) and the sound output means (in this example, the speaker 27 shown in FIG. 25) are displayed.
The production is performed using the sound output from 2,277).

The effect elements used in the setting suggestion effect A may be of a plurality of types, and may be displayed by a display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23) or a sound output means (for example, the speaker 272 shown in FIG. 25). The sound output from 277), the light output from the optical output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23, the lamp such as the side lamp 144 shown in FIG. 23), and the movable body (for example,). Movement of the shutter (shielding device) 163) shown in FIG. 23 (
For example, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement) and the like can be arbitrarily combined.

The effect content "even number suggestion image" is a liquid crystal display that suggests that the set value may be an even number (in this example, one of setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6) as the setting suggestion effect A. A voice that is displayed on the display device 157 and suggests that the set value may be an even number is displayed.
This is an effect output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The effect content "odd number suggestion image" is a liquid crystal display that suggests that the setting value may be an odd number (in this example, any of setting 1, setting 3, and setting 5) as the setting suggestion effect A. A voice that is displayed on the display device 157 and suggests that the set value may be an odd number is displayed.
This is an effect output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The setting value of the effect content "high setting suggestion image" is set as high as the setting suggestion effect A (in this example,
The image suggesting that there is a possibility of setting 5 or setting 6) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the sound suggesting that the setting value may be set is 272, 277. It is a production output from.

The setting value of the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" is an even number (in this example, as the setting suggestion effect A).
An image suggesting that it is confirmed to be one of setting 2, setting 4, and setting 6)
It is an effect of displaying on the liquid crystal display device 157 and outputting the sound suggesting that the set value is an even number from the speakers 272 and 277.

The effect content "4 or more confirmed image" suggests that the setting value is set to 4 or more (in this example, any of setting 4, setting 5, and setting 6) as the setting suggestion effect A. This is an effect of displaying the image to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 and outputting the sound suggesting that the set value is set to 4 or more from the speakers 272 and 277.

The effect content "5 or more confirmed image" displays an image suggesting that the set value is set to 5 or more (setting 5 or setting 6 in this example) as the setting suggestion effect A on the liquid crystal display. It is an effect of displaying the sound on the device 157 and outputting the sound suggesting that the set value is set to 5 or more from the speakers 272 and 277.

In the effect content "6 confirmed image", as the setting suggestion effect A, an image suggesting that the set value is confirmed to be set 6 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the set value is set to 6. It is an effect of outputting a sound suggesting that it is present from the speakers 272 and 277.

The content of the setting suggestion effect is not limited to this example, and for example, an effect that vaguely suggests a setting value (for example, an effect including a display such as "setting 5? Setting 6?" It may be an effect suggesting a range (for example, an effect including display and sound such as "setting 2 to setting 4").

<Setting suggestion effect A / Low probability mode>
In the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A, the lottery data corresponding to the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is referred to, and whether or not the setting suggestion effect A is executed is executed based on the current set value. If so, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect A is determined.

For example, when the current setting value is setting 1 or setting 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect A is not executed. 99% when the current setting value is setting 2.
With the probability of, "No execution" is selected and the setting suggestion effect A is not executed, but with a probability of 1%, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" is executed.

When the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 98% chance that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and there is a 1% chance that the effect content "even number setting confirmed image" will be displayed. The setting suggestion effect A is executed, and the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "4 or more confirmed images" is executed with a 1% probability.

When the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 98% chance that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and there is a 1% chance that the effect content "4 or more confirmed image" will be displayed. The setting suggestion effect A is executed, and the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "5 or more confirmed images" is executed with a 1% probability.

When the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 96% chance that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect A will not be executed, and there is a 1% chance that the effect content "even setting confirmed image" will be displayed. Execute the setting suggestion effect A, execute the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "4 or more confirmed image" with a 1% probability, and execute the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "5 or more confirmed image" with a 1% probability. Execute and have a 1% chance of producing the content "
6 The setting suggestion effect A of "confirmed image" is executed.

<Setting suggestion effect A / High probability mode>
In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A, the lottery data corresponding to the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is referred to, and the effect content of the setting suggestion effect A is determined based on the current set value. In the high probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% in all of the settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect A is always executed.

When the current setting value is setting 1, there is a 47% chance that the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even suggestion image" will be executed, and a 47% chance that the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion image" will be executed. The effect A is executed, and the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "high setting suggestion image" is executed with a probability of 6%.

When the current setting value is setting 2, there is a 56% chance that the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even suggestion image" will be executed, and a 38% chance that the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion image" will be executed. The effect A is executed, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "high setting suggestion image" is executed with a probability of 5%, and the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even setting confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current setting value is setting 3, there is a 37% chance that the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even suggestion image" will be executed, and a 55% chance that the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion image" will be executed. The effect A is executed, and the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "high setting suggestion image" is executed with an 8% probability.

When the current setting value is setting 4, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even suggestion image" is executed with a 54% probability, and the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion image" is executed with a 34% probability. The staging A is executed, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "high setting suggestion image" is executed with an 8% probability, and the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even setting confirmed image" is executed with a 3% probability. There is a 1% chance that the production content will be "4".
The setting suggestion effect A of "the above confirmed image" is executed.

When the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 31% chance that the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even suggestion image" will be executed, and a 58% chance that the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion image" will be executed. Execute the effect A, execute the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "high setting suggestion image" with a probability of 9%, execute the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "4 or more confirmed image" with a probability of 1%, and execute the effect. With a 1% probability, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "5 or more confirmed images" is executed.

When the current setting value is setting 6, the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even suggestion image" is executed with a 51% probability, and the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion image" is executed with a 29% probability. Execute the effect A, execute the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "high setting suggestion image" with a probability of 10%, execute the setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "even setting confirmed image" with a probability of 5%, and execute the effect. There is a 2% chance that the production will be "
Execute the setting suggestion effect A of "4 or more confirmed images", and there is a 2% probability that the effect content "5 or more confirmed images"
The setting suggestion effect A of the effect content "6 confirmed image" is executed with a probability of 1%.

As described above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is the effect of vaguely suggesting the set value in the high probability mode as compared with the low probability mode (“even suggestion image”, “odd suggestion image”, and “odd number suggestion image”.
The execution probability of "high setting suggestion image") is high. By doing so, even in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to promote the game for a long period of time.

Also, in the low probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so when it is executed, the effect of vaguely suggesting the set value ("even suggestion image", "odd suggestion image", "high setting suggestion image") is executed. By lowering the probability, it is prevented that the estimation of the set value becomes too difficult.

Further, the second feature of the setting suggestion effect A selection table is that in the low probability mode, the setting suggestion effect A is more easily executed in the case of the setting 4 to the setting 6 than in the case of the setting 1 to the setting 3. There are points. By doing so, when the execution is executed in the low probability mode in which the execution probability itself is extremely low, an effect that gives a good impression is executed (settings 4 to 6 give a better impression). (Because it may be executed), it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable and to promote the game for a long period of time.

The selection probabilities shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example are merely examples, and are not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in the low probability mode settings 1 to 3, it was not executed, but it may be executed, and in the high probability mode, it was always executed, but it is not executed. You may make things happen.

<Setting suggestion effect B>
Next, the setting suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 30A is a time chart showing an example of the game period of the high-probability mode and the low-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B.

In this example, in the AT state or ED state of the advantageous section, the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on) is used as a rare role (in this example, small role 1 (watermelon) or small role 2 (cherry)). When the internal winning is won, the setting suggestion effect B lottery using the setting suggestion effect B selection table described later is executed regardless of the operation order (push order) and the operation timing of the stop operation by the stop buttons 137 to 139. , The setting suggestion effect B is in a state where it can be executed.

There are two types of the setting suggestion effect B lottery in this example, a low probability mode and a high probability mode in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect B is higher than this low probability mode.

The start conditions of the low-probability mode and the high-probability mode are not particularly limited, but in this example, FIG. 30 (a).
), The low-probability mode is set in the game in which the gaming state is AT, and the high-probability mode is set in the game in which the gaming state is ED. Therefore, in this example, the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect B in the ED state is higher than the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect B in the AT state. The execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect B in the AT state may be set to 0%, and the setting suggestion effect B may not be executed in the AT state.

Further, in this example, the execution period of the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B (in this example, 20 games +
α) is set to be at least a period longer than the execution period (10 games in this example) of the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A.

As will be described in detail later, in the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B, when the rare role is won, the setting suggestion effect B is always executed. Therefore, the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B is the setting suggestion effect A. It can be said that the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is higher than that of the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A having an extremely low execution probability.

Then, even if the setting suggestion effect B is executed before the predetermined number of games (20 games + α) has elapsed in the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B, until the end condition of the ED state is satisfied. When the high probability mode is continued and the end condition of the ED state is satisfied and the state shifts from the high navigation state (advantageous section) to the low navigation state (normal section), the setting suggestion effect A and B are included. When the state shifts from the low navigation state (normal section) to the high navigation state (advantageous section) again without executing the setting, the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is set.

According to this example, by providing a period of the high probability mode in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is high, which is different from the period of the low probability mode, the game is immediately terminated (immediately disappointing) after the period of the low probability mode ends. It can be made difficult and the operating rate can be improved.

Further, in the ED state, even if the rare role is won, the additional lottery is not executed, so that the player feels lost even if the rare role is won. By executing, it is possible to relieve the player's lost mood.

From the period from the end of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A to the start of the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B, the setting suggestion effect A is performed after the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B ends.
Period until the start of the high-probability mode of (the period shown as a normal section in FIG. 30 (a))
Is preferable, but it goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to this.

<Setting suggestion effect B selection table>
FIG. 30B is a diagram showing an example of a setting suggestion effect B selection table used for the setting suggestion effect B lottery.

The setting suggestion effect B lottery is a lottery for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect B, and if so, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect B. In this example, the setting suggestion effect B is performed by the lottery.
If it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect B, the setting suggestion effect B is executed in the game in which the lottery is executed.

The game that executes the setting suggestion effect B is not limited to the game that executes the setting suggestion effect B lottery, and may be a game that is later than the game that executes the setting suggestion effect B lottery.

Of the "effect contents" in the setting suggestion effect B selection table shown in FIG. 30B, "no execution" indicates that the setting suggestion effect B is not executed, and the other effect contents indicate the setting suggestion to be executed. The production content of the production B is shown.

In the setting suggestion effect B, the effect is performed using only the sound output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25) among the plurality of types of effect elements.

The number of effect elements used in the setting suggestion effect B may be one or a plurality as long as it is smaller than the number of effect elements used in the setting suggestion effect A, and the display means (for example, the liquid crystal display device 1 shown in FIG. 23).
57) display, sound output from sound output means (for example, speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25), optical output means (for example, backlights of reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23, shown in FIG. 23). One of the light output from the side lamp 144 and the like, the movement of the movable body (for example, the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 23) (for example, vibration, rotation, expansion and contraction, vertical movement), and the like. One, multiple, or all can be selected arbitrarily.

Further, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect B is output from the sound output means (in this example, the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25) among the effect contents of the setting suggestion effect A described with reference to FIG. 29 (b). Since it is the same as the production performed using the sound to be performed, the description thereof will be omitted.

<Setting suggestion effect B / Low probability mode>
In the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B, the lottery data corresponding to the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is referred to, and whether or not the setting suggestion effect B is executed is executed based on the current set value. If so, the effect content of the setting suggestion effect B is determined.

For example, if the current setting value is setting 1 to setting 3, there is a 100% probability that "no execution" will occur.
Is selected and the setting suggestion effect B is not executed. When the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 99% probability that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and there is a 1% probability that the effect content "4" will be executed.
The setting suggestion effect B of "above confirmed voice" is executed.

When the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 98% probability that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and there is a 1% probability that the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" will be displayed. The setting suggestion effect B is executed, and the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a probability of 1%.

When the current setting value is setting 6, there is a 97% chance that "no execution" will be selected and the setting suggestion effect B will not be executed, and there is a 1% chance that the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" will be displayed. Execute the setting suggestion effect B, execute the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "5 or more confirmed voice" with a 1% probability, and execute the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "6 confirmed voice" with a 1% probability. ..

<Setting suggestion effect B / High probability mode>
In the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B, the lottery data corresponding to the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is referred to, and the effect content of the setting suggestion effect B is determined based on the current set value. In the high probability mode, the probability that "no execution" is selected is 0% in all of the settings 1 to 6, and the setting suggestion effect B is always executed.

When the current setting value is setting 1, there is a 38% probability that the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even suggestion voice" is executed, and a 57% probability that the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion voice" is performed. The effect B is executed, and the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "high setting suggestion voice" is executed with a probability of 5%.

When the current setting value is setting 2, there is a 57% probability that the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even suggestion voice" is executed, and a 38% probability that the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion voice" is performed. The effect B is executed, and the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "high setting suggestion voice" is executed with a probability of 5%.

When the current setting value is setting 3, there is a 37% probability that the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even suggestion voice" is executed, and a 55% probability that the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion voice" is performed. The effect B is executed, and the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "high setting suggestion voice" is executed with a probability of 8%.

When the current setting value is setting 4, there is a 54% chance that the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even suggestion voice" will be executed, and a 36% chance that the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion voice" will be executed. The staging B is executed, the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "high setting suggestion voice" is executed with an 8% probability, and the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a 2% probability.

When the current setting value is setting 5, there is a 34% chance that the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even suggestion voice" will be executed, and a 51% chance that the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion voice" will be executed. The staging B is executed, the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "high setting suggestion voice" is executed with a probability of 10%, and the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" is executed with a 3% probability. There is a 2% chance that the production content will be "5".
The setting suggestion effect B of "above confirmed voice" is executed.

When the current setting value is setting 6, the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "even suggestion voice" is executed with a probability of 49%, and the setting suggestion of the effect content "odd suggestion voice" is performed with a probability of 33%. Execute the effect B, and with a 10% probability, execute the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "high setting suggestion voice", and 3.5%.
The setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "4 or more confirmed voice" is executed with the probability of, and the setting suggestion effect B of the effect content "5 or more confirmed voice" is executed with the probability of 2.5%, and the effect is produced with the probability of 2%. The setting suggestion effect B of the content "6 confirmed voice" is executed.

As described above, the first feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is the effect of vaguely suggesting the set value in the high probability mode as compared with the low probability mode (“even suggestion image”, “odd suggestion image”, and “odd number suggestion image”.
The execution probability of "high setting suggestion image") is high. By doing so, even in the high probability mode, it is possible to prevent the player from easily guessing the set value, and it is possible to promote the game for a long period of time.

Also, in the low probability mode, the execution probability itself is extremely low, so when it is executed, the effect of vaguely suggesting the set value ("even suggestion image", "odd suggestion image", "high setting suggestion image") is executed. By lowering the probability, it is prevented that the estimation of the set value becomes too difficult.

Further, the second feature of the setting suggestion effect B selection table is that in the low probability mode, the setting suggestion effect A is more likely to be executed in the case of the setting 4 to the setting 6 than in the case of the setting 1 to the setting 3. There are points. By doing so, when the execution is executed in the low probability mode in which the execution probability itself is extremely low, an effect that gives a good impression is executed (settings 4 to 6 give a better impression). (Because it may be executed), it is possible to prevent the player from being uncomfortable and to promote the game for a long period of time.

The selection probabilities shown in the setting suggestion effect A selection table of this example are merely examples, and are not limited to the numerical values of this example. For example, in the low probability mode settings 1 to 3, it was not executed, but it may be executed, and in the high probability mode, it was always executed, but it is not executed. You may make things happen.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, with reference to FIG. 31, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 has a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on.
A start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 for outputting the above is provided. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process shown in FIG. 31 according to the control program stored in the ROM 306 in advance.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial settings are performed in step S101. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT is set.
Permission to operate 314 and setting of initial values are performed.

In step S102, the bet number setting / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for sending an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted. If the player wins the re-game combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so that the player does not need to insert medals. In addition, it checks whether the start lever 135 has been operated, and the start lever 1
If there is an operation of 35, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line confirmation process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is acquired, and a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is shown. Preparations are made for transmitting the internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

In step S105, the reel stop data selection process for selecting the reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S105, the first sub-control unit 400 issues a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data.
Get ready to send to.

In step S106, the effect state control process related to the control of the game state of the AT system described above is executed based on the start lever operation. In step S107, the staging process is executed. In this effect processing, various effects are controlled.

In step S108, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S109, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop data stop table is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to the reel 110 ~ according to the number of lead-in frames set in the stop table.
Stop any of 112. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S110. In this step S109, the stop button reception command relating to the stop buttons 137 to 139 for which the stop operation was performed for each stop operation (specifically, for the first stop operation, the stop button reception 1 command and the second stop operation). For, stop button reception 2 command,
For the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel stop command regarding the reel stop position (details, for details, A reel stop 1 command for the first stop reel, a reel stop 2 command for the second stop operation, and a reel stop 3 command for the third stop operation) are sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Get ready to send.

In step S110, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning judgment process,
When a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. For example, if "bell-bell-bell" is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the player has won the small role 3 (bell). Further, in this step S110, the first sub-control unit 400 issues a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination.
Get ready to send to.

In step S111, a medal granting process is performed. In the medal granting process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S112, the game state control process is performed. In the game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state of the RT system is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game state command including information indicating the game state of the current RT system.

In step S113, the effect state control process related to the control of the AT system gaming state described above is executed. In step S114, the high navigation state end processing related to the end of the high navigation state is executed.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are command setting transmission processing (step S2 in FIG. 32) of the main control unit timer interrupt processing described later.
It is transmitted in 06).

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 32. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, C
Processing such as temporarily saving the value of each register of PU304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the count value of WDT314 is the initial setting value (32 in this embodiment).
.. To prevent WDT interrupts from occurring beyond 8 ms) (to prevent processing abnormalities from being detected)
The WDT314 is restarted periodically (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit).

In step S203, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed. In step S2005, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S206, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S207, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormality, medal payout abnormality, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, the error is detected. (Not shown) Error processing is executed. Further, the medal selector 170 (medal blocker in which the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 operates), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) displays are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211. When the low voltage signal is off (when the power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end processing, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S2001 is set in each of the original registers. After that, the process returns to the main processing of the main control unit shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of RAM 308, and power failure processing such as initialization of the input / output port is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33. In addition, FIG. 33 (
a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 33B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 33 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (a).

When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the area for storing the internal winning information, which is the information representing the result of the internal winning, and the area for storing the RT update information, which is the information representing the gaming state, are each RAM4.
It is provided in 08.

In step S302, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S300.
Move to the process of 3. In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. Step S3
In 04, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, the effect control process is performed. Here, the production is prepared according to the production reservation information in the production reservation area provided in the RAM 408. For this preparation, for example
It includes processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and updating the effect data when it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is an instruction to the sound source IC 418 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is output to the sound source IC 418. In step S307, step S30
The lamp control process is performed based on the process result of 5. For example, if there is an instruction to various lamps 420 in the effect data read in step S305, this instruction is given to the drive circuit 422.
Output to.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S3005. For example, if there is a command to the shutter 163 in the effect data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 424. In step S309, information output processing for setting to send a command to the second sub-control unit 500 is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S305, a setting to output this control command is made.
Return to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is regarded as an unprocessed command in the RAM 40.
It is stored in the command storage area provided in 8.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 33 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 33A, and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S502,
Sending a command to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, updating the effect random value, and the like are performed.

<Processing of the second sub-control unit>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34. In addition, FIG. 34 (
a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 34B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 34 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 34 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 34 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S601. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization process of the storage area in the VRAM 536, and the like are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, step S603.
Move to the processing of. In step S4003, 0 is assigned to the timer variable. Step S6
In 04, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S605, the staging control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S604, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S606, image control processing (details will be described later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a display image (notification image,
Image control for the background image) is executed. When this image control process is completed, step S
Return to 602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 34 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 34 (a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S802
Updates the random value for staging.

Next, using FIG. 34 (d), step S6 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500.
The image control process of 06 will be described. The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 536 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506) in the attribute register of the VDP 534 based on the position information table.
After setting the VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 536) and the like, an instruction for instructing the start of transfer of image data from ROM 506 to VRAM 536 is set. VDP534 is
Image data is transferred from ROM 506 to VR based on the instruction set in the attribute register.
Transfer to AM536. After that, the VDP 534 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S903. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S903, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, the CPU 504 is VR in step S901.
Information of image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of VRAM 536, image size, VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), transparency) in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of VRAM 536 based on the image data transferred to AM 536. Degree etc.) is instructed to VDP534. V
The DP534 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 is VDP.
Instructs 534 to start drawing an image. The VDP 534 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 534 based on the end of image drawing is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, step S90.
Proceed to 6, otherwise wait for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

In step S906, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

<Production example 1 of setting suggestion production A>
Next, an effect example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 35. Note that FIG. 35 is a diagram showing the effect example 1 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

The production example 1 is an production example in which a small winning combination 5 (one piece combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on) in a game in which the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is set. Is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 35A is a state before the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135.

In this example, a normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and a low probability of the setting suggestion effect A is output in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. The character C1 (in this example, the character of Sabohani) suggesting that the mode is set is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 35B is a state immediately after the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135. In this example, the small winning combination 5 (1 piece combination) is internally won by the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on).

<Production example of setting suggestion production A / Forward push>
The state shown in FIG. 35 (c) is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by pressing forward (LCR).

In this example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 in the operation order (forward pressing) in which the setting suggestion effect A can be executed.
Since the stop operation of 139 has been performed, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table is executed, and the setting suggestion effect A is executed by the lottery.

Further, since it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect A in the next game, the treasure box was imitated as a suggestion effect suggesting that the setting suggestion effect A is executed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. The character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 35 (d) is a state in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game.
In this example, as the setting suggestion effect A, the moving image PD1 (4 or more confirmed images) in which rice pops out from the opened treasure box is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the speaker 272, 277 is dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A. BGM (4 or more confirmed audio) is output.

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantages and disadvantages of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to perform a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous.However, according to this example, in the low-base game. By executing the setting suggestion effect A, it is possible to encourage (promote) the low-base game in which the AT is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suggest the set value, so that the player is interested. Can be enhanced.

<Production example of setting suggestion production A1 / Irregular push>
The state shown in FIG. 35 (e) is an irregular push (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL).
The stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been performed, and the state shown in FIG. 35 (f) is a state showing the effect in the next game.

In this example, the stop button 13 is in an operation order (irregular pressing) in which the setting suggestion effect A cannot be executed.
Since the stop operations of 7 to 139 were performed, the setting suggestion effect A (in this example, the moving image PD1) and
The suggestion effect (character C2 in this example) that suggests that the setting suggestion effect A is executed is
Do not do either.

If the setting suggestion effect A is executed by pressing an anomaly that is a high-base game, the player can detect the setting while suppressing the number of medals to be inserted. However, according to this example, the anomaly that is a high-base game. Since the setting suggestion effect A is not executed by pushing, it is possible to prevent the setting detection by the high-base game and to encourage (promote) the player to perform the low-base game.

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A>
Next, an effect example 2 of the setting suggestion effect A will be described with reference to FIG. 36. Note that FIG. 36 is a diagram showing the effect example 2 of the setting suggestion effect A in chronological order.

The effect example 2 is an effect example in which a small winning combination 5 (one piece combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on) in a game in which the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is set. Is shown.

The state shown in FIG. 36A is a state immediately after the pressing operation (lever on) of the start lever 135.

In this example, a normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, a normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and a high probability of the setting suggestion effect A is output in the sub display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. The character C3 (in this example, the character of the Sabohani covered with the aura image) suggesting that the mode is set is displayed.
In this example, the small winning combination 5 (1 piece combination) is internally won by the internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on).

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A / Forward push>
The state shown in FIG. 36B is a state in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by pressing forward (LCR).

In this example, the stop button 137 to the stop button 137 in the operation order (forward pressing) in which the setting suggestion effect A can be executed.
Since the stop operation of 139 has been performed, it is determined that the setting suggestion effect A lottery using the setting suggestion effect A selection table is executed, and the setting suggestion effect A is executed by the lottery.

Further, since it was decided to execute the setting suggestion effect A in the next game, the treasure box was imitated as a suggestion effect suggesting that the setting suggestion effect A is executed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. The character C2 is displayed.

The state shown in FIG. 36 (c) is a state in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed in the next game.

In this example, as the setting suggestion effect A, the moving image PD2 (5 or more confirmed images) in which the panda character pops out from the opened treasure box is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the setting suggestion effect A is displayed from the speakers 272 and 277. Dedicated BGM (5 or more confirmed voice) is output.

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantages and disadvantages of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to perform a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous.However, according to this example, in the low-base game. By executing the setting suggestion effect A, it is possible to encourage (promote) the low-base game in which the AT is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suggest the set value, so that the player is interested. Can be enhanced.

FIG. 36 (d) shows a state in which the setting suggestion effect A is finished and the setting suggestion effect A is shifted from the high probability mode to the low probability mode.

In this example, when a predetermined time (for example, 3 seconds) has elapsed after the display of the setting suggestion effect A is started, the setting suggestion effect A is terminated and the normal effect is displayed in the main display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. , Normal BGM is output from the speakers 272 and 277, and the liquid crystal display device 1
In the sub-display area of 57, the character C1 (in this example, the character of Sabohani) suggesting that the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is set is displayed.

<Production example 2 of setting suggestion production A / Irregular push>
The state shown in FIG. 36 (e) is an irregular push (any of CLR, CRL, RLC, and RCL).
The stop operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 has been performed, and the state shown in FIG. 36 (f) is a state showing the effect in the next game.

In this example, the stop button 13 is in an operation order (irregular pressing) in which the setting suggestion effect A cannot be executed.
Since the stop operation of 7 to 139 was performed, the setting suggestion effect A (in this example, the moving image PD2) and
The suggestion effect (character C2 in this example) that suggests that the setting suggestion effect A is executed is
Do not do either.

If the setting suggestion effect A is executed by pressing an anomaly that is a high-base game, the player can detect the setting while suppressing the number of medals to be inserted. However, according to this example, the anomaly that is a high-base game. Since the setting suggestion effect A is not executed by pushing, it is possible to prevent the setting detection by the high-base game and to encourage (promote) the player to perform the low-base game.

In this example, when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped by pressing irregularly (either CLR, CRL, RLC, or RCL), the high-probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is continued, and the high-probability mode is continued. The character C3 (in this example, the character of Sabohani covered with the aura image) that suggests that is set is continued to be displayed, but the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A is triggered by the stop operation of the irregular pressing. It may be configured to shift to the low probability mode from.

Further, in the setting suggestion effect A of this example, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is also different depending on the setting suggestion image, but the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is common regardless of which setting suggestion image is displayed.
May be output. That is, in this case, the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect A is a BGM that notifies that the setting suggestion effect A is being executed.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect A of this example is not executed in the AT state or the ED state, it may be possible to execute the setting suggestion effect A in the AT state or the ED state.

<Example of setting suggestion effect B>
Next, an example of the setting suggestion effect B will be described with reference to FIG. 37. In addition, FIG. 37 is shown in FIG.
It is a figure which showed the effect example of setting suggestion effect B in chronological order.

This production example is an production example in which a small winning combination 5 (1 piece combination) is internally won in an internal lottery when the start lever 135 is pressed (lever on) in a game in which the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B is set. Is shown.

The states shown in FIGS. 37 (a) to 37 (c) are AT states in the advantageous section. In the state shown in FIG. 37 (a), the number of games remaining in the advantageous section is 20 in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.
In addition to notifying that it is one game, the BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

In the state shown in the following figure (b), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, it is notified that the number of remaining games in the advantageous section is 200 games, and the BGM during AT is output from the speakers 272 and 277. There is.

In the state shown in the following figure (c), in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, the transition from the next game to the ED state is notified, and the speakers 272 and 277 indicate B during AT.
GM is being output.

On the other hand, the states shown in FIGS. 37 (d) to 37 (f) are ED states in the advantageous section. FIG. 37 (
In the state shown in d), the ED effect is executed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157, and the BGM during ED is output from the speakers 272 and 277.

In the state shown in the following figure (e), since the rare role (in this example, the small role 1 (watermelon)) was internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 was pressed (lever on), the setting suggestion effect B The setting suggestion effect B lottery using the selection table is executed, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect B by the lottery. Then, 4 or more confirmed voices) are output.

In the state shown in the following figure (f), since the rare role (in this example, the small role 2 (cherry)) was internally won in the internal lottery when the start lever 135 was pressed (lever on), the setting suggestion effect B The setting suggestion effect B lottery using the selection table is executed, and it is decided to execute the setting suggestion effect B by the lottery. Then, the high setting suggestion voice) is output.

According to this example, by executing the setting suggestion effect B, it is possible to suggest the set value, so that the interest of the player can be increased. In addition, since it is possible to execute the setting suggestion effect B (second setting suggestion effect) that suggests the currently set setting value, which is different from the setting suggestion effect A (first setting suggestion effect), the setting suggestion effect Variations can be increased, and expectations and interest in setting suggestion staging can be increased.

In addition, according to this example, there is a high possibility that more setting suggestion effects will be executed than in the low-probability mode of setting suggestion effects. Can be prevented. In addition, it is possible to prevent other effects from being hindered in the ED state, perform various effects, and improve the interest of the game. Further, in the ED state, even if the rare role is won, the additional lottery is not executed, so that the player feels lost even if the rare role is won. By executing, it is possible to relieve the player's lost mood.

In this example, the speaker 272, 277 outputs the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B in addition to the BGM during the ED, but instead of the BGM during the ED, only the BGM dedicated to the setting suggestion effect B is output. It may be configured as.

Further, although the setting suggestion effect B of this example is set to be executed in the AT state or the ED state, it may be executed in a state other than the AT state or the ED state, or it may be executed only in the ED state. Is also good.

As described above, the game console according to this example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, the reel 110 shown in FIG. 1) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and rotationally driven.
~ 112) and a plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels.
), A setting means (for example, a setting key, a setting switch) capable of setting one of a plurality of setting values (for example, setting 1 to setting 6), and the plurality of setting means set by the setting means. Internal lottery means (for example,) that derives the result of internal winning based on the lottery information corresponding to the set value.
The reel corresponding to the stop button in which the stop operation is performed based on the winning combination internal lottery process (shown in FIG. 31) and the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. A game value (for example, a medal) is given according to the stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 31) that controls the stop to be stopped and the stop mode of the plurality of reels stopped by the stop control means. (For example, the medal payout process shown in FIG. 31) and the game control means (for example, the game state control shown in FIG. 31) that can control the progress of the game and change the ease of acquiring the game value. A game table including a processing) and an effect control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 25) for executing an effect according to the progress of the game. The game control means is one game state from a plurality of game states including at least a first game state (for example, a normal game state) and a second game state (for example, an AT state) different from the first game state. Is possible, and the first gaming state is terminated based on the fact that the first condition is satisfied (for example, winning the AT lottery) while the first gaming state is set. The second gaming state can be set, and the second is set after the first condition is satisfied based on the operation result of the stop button of the player in the first gaming state. It is a means capable of changing the ease of acquiring the game value in the game state of the above, and the stop control means is a first lottery result (for example, a small winning combination 3b) by the internal lottery means.
Push order bell RLC), small role 3c (push order bell CRL), small role 3e (push order bell CLR), small role 3
In a game in which f (one of the push order bell RCL) is derived, when the stop button is operated by the first operation (for example, forward push (LCR), scissors striking (LRC)), the plurality. In a game in which the reel is stopped in the first stop mode (for example, a symbol combination other than "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol") and the first lottery result is derived, the stop button is the second. When operated by an operation (for example, irregular pressing (CLR, CRL, RLC, RCL)), the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode (for example, "bell symbol-bell symbol-bell symbol"). It is a means for stopping by a symbol combination), and the game value giving means is a second stopping mode than when the plurality of reels are stopped in the first stopping mode (for example, paying out one medal). The case of stopping at (for example, paying out 12 medals) is a means for imparting more of the game value, and the game control means is the first lottery result in the first game state. Is derived, and when the plurality of reels are stopped in the second stop mode, the first lottery result is derived in the first gaming state, and the plurality of reels are in the first stop mode. When the ease of acquiring the game value in the second gaming state set after the first condition is satisfied is more disadvantageous to the player than in the case of stopping at (for example, an irregularity in a normal game). In a game in which the stop operation is performed by pushing, the AT lottery is not executed, or the number of games in one set of AT games is reduced, and AT is determined by the number of irregular pushes.
The initial number of games and the probability of addition at the time of winning are disadvantageous, and when each game point lottery is performed and an irregular push is made on the game console that determines the AT performance according to the points, the point lottery becomes disadvantageous. In a game in which the stop operation is performed by pressing irregularly in a normal game, the winning probability of the AT lottery is lowered, the execution frequency of the operation navigation in the AT game is lowered, the set continuation lottery is not executed in the AT game, and the set continuation lottery is performed in the AT game. (Or, make sure to change it disadvantageously), and the staging control means is a game in which the second condition is satisfied (for example, a game in which a small winning combination 5 (1 piece combination) is internally won). ), When the stop button is operated by the first operation, the first setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set value (for example, the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 35 (e)). It is a game table characterized by being a means capable of executing the setting suggestion effect A (moving image PD2) shown in the moving image PD1) and FIG. 36C.

Since the player cannot visually determine the advantages and disadvantages of the AT, it is necessary to encourage the player to perform a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous, but it is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect in the low-base game. By doing so, it is possible to encourage (promote) a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous to the player, and it is possible to suggest a set value, so that the player's interest can be increased. ..

It should be noted that the "condition for satisfying the second condition" according to the present invention is not limited to the internal winning of the winning combination, that the winning combination has been won, and that a certain gaming state (for example, the ED state of the advantageous section). It may be that a certain lottery has been won, a certain effect (for example, a continuous effect) has been executed, and the like.

Further, the effect control means does not execute the first setting suggestion effect when the stop button is operated by the second operation even in the game in which the second condition is satisfied (or the effect control means does not execute the first setting suggestion effect).
It may not be executed).

With such a configuration, it is possible to prevent the setting detection by the high-base game and to encourage (promote) the low-base game to the player.

Further, the second condition is the result of the second lottery (for example, the small winning combination 5) by the internal lottery means.
(1 card combination)) may be derived. The winning combination for adjusting the base is only for adjusting the base, so that the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect is adjusted. The winning probability cannot be changed, and the execution frequency of the setting suggestion effect may become too high or too low, but the second condition is
If the second lottery result is derived by the internal lottery means, the setting suggestion effect is performed by using the winning combination different from the winning combination for adjusting the base as the execution condition of the setting suggestion effect. It is possible to easily adjust the execution frequency of.

Further, the first setting suggestion effect may be an effect that can be executed in the first gaming state.

Even if the first setting suggestion effect is executed during AT, the advantages and disadvantages of AT have already been determined during AT, and the timing is late to encourage low-base games, so it is necessary to execute it in normal games. However, if the first setting suggestion effect is an effect that can be executed in the first game state, the first setting suggestion effect is an effect that encourages a low-base game in which AT is advantageous. Therefore, it is possible to more effectively encourage a low-base game in which the AT is advantageous by executing the game in the normal game before the AT.

Further, the effect control means is different from the first setting suggestion effect, and the second setting suggestion effect suggesting the currently set value (for example, the setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 37 (e)).
(4 or more confirmed voices)) may be an executable means.

With such a configuration, the variation of the setting suggestion effect can be increased, and the expectation and interest in the setting suggestion effect can be increased.

Further, the game console according to this example (for example, the slot machine shown in FIG. 1) has a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 1) which are subjected to a plurality of types of symbols and are rotationally driven.
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139 shown in FIG. 1) and a plurality of set values (for example, for example) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels. Based on the setting means (for example, setting key, setting switch) capable of setting the setting value of one of the settings 1 to 6) and the lottery information corresponding to the plurality of setting values set by the setting means. Based on the internal lottery means for deriving the result of the internal winning (for example, the winning combination internal lottery process shown in FIG. 31) and the lottery result derived by the internal lottery means after the plurality of reels are rotationally driven. A stop control means (for example, the reel stop control process shown in FIG. 31) that controls the stop to stop the reel corresponding to the stop button on which the stop operation has been performed.
A staging control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 4 shown in FIG. 25) that executes a staging according to the progress of a game.
00, a second sub-control unit 500), and the effect control means is a setting suggestion effect (for example, a setting suggestion effect A (moving image PD1) shown in FIG. 35 (e)) in a predetermined period. ,
Setting suggestion effect A (video PD2) shown in FIG. 36 (c), setting suggestion effect B shown in FIG. 37 (e).
(4 or more confirmed voices)) is an executable means, and the setting suggestion effect is a display by an effect element (for example, a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 23) or a sound output means (for example, for example). The sound output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 25, the light output means (for example, the backlight of the reels 110 to 112 shown in FIG. 23, and the side lamp 14 shown in FIG. 23).
It is currently set using the light output from a lamp such as 4) and the movement (eg, vibration, rotation, expansion / contraction, vertical movement) of a movable body (for example, the shutter (shielding device) 163 shown in FIG. 23). It is a game table characterized in that it is an effect suggesting the above-mentioned set value.

According to the game console according to this example, since it is possible to suggest the setting value currently set by the setting suggestion effect using the effect element, it is possible to increase the interest of the player and improve the operation rate. can.

Further, the predetermined period includes a first period (for example, a period of the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 29 (a)) and a second period different from the first period (for example, non-). 10 games after the transition from the advantageous section to the advantageous section (the period of the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 29 (a))
), And the setting suggestion effect may be more easily executed in the second period than in the first period. The "first period" according to the present invention may be a period in which the setting suggestion effect is more difficult to be executed than the "second period", and may be a period in which the setting suggestion is not executed.

With such a configuration, by providing a second period with a high probability of executing the setting suggestion effect, which is different from the first period, it is difficult to immediately end the game (immediately disappoint) after the end of the first period. It is possible to improve the operating rate.

Further, the game control means (for example, the game state control process shown in FIG. 31) capable of controlling the progress of the game and changing the ease of acquiring the game value is provided, and the game control means is the first game. situation(
For example, a normal gaming state) and a second gaming state different from the first gaming state (eg, A).
One game state can be set from a plurality of game states including at least the T state), and the first condition is satisfied while the first game state is set (for example, the AT lottery is won). It is a means capable of ending the first gaming state and setting the second gaming state based on the above), and after the second gaming state is finished, the first period is longer than that of the first period. The second period may be set before.

With such a configuration, by setting a second period in which the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect is high after the end of the second gaming state advantageous to the player, the game is played after the end of the second gaming state. Can be made difficult to finish immediately (immediately disappointing), and the operating rate can be improved.

Further, the predetermined period is a third period different from the first period and the second period (in addition, the predetermined period is different from the first period and the second period.
For example, the 20 games in the ED state shown in FIG. 30 (a) (the period of the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect B) are included, and the setting suggestion effect is shown in the first period (for example, FIG. 29 (a)). The third period is easier to execute than the setting suggestion effect A (the period of the low probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A), and the third period is the second period (for example, after the transition from the non-advantageous section to the advantageous section). 10 games (Fig. 2)
The period is longer than the setting suggestion effect A (the period of the high probability mode of the setting suggestion effect A shown in 9 (a))), and the setting suggestion effect A (for example, the moving image PD2) shown in FIG. 36 (c) is set in the second period. )
) (For example, the display by the liquid crystal display device 157 and the sound output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIG. 36 (c)), and the setting suggestion effect in the third period (for example, FIG. 37). The number of the effect elements used in the setting suggestion effect B (4 or more confirmed voices) shown in (e) is smaller (for example, output from the speakers 272 and 277 shown in FIGS. 37 (e) and 37 (f)). It may be (voice only).

With such a configuration, the third period is longer than the second period, and there is a high possibility that more setting suggestion effects will be executed than during the second period, so it is set with fewer effect elements. By performing the suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the setting suggestion effect from being annoying. In addition, it is possible to prevent the other productions from being hindered in the third period, perform various productions, and improve the interest of the game.

Further, the gaming table according to the present invention can also be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the "enclosed gaming machine" circulates and uses the gaming balls enclosed in the gaming machine. Further, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured by one chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured.
The sub-control unit may be configured to enable bidirectional communication. Further, while bidirectional communication is possible between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done. In addition, the range of the game may be further expanded by applying the content described in one configuration to the other configurations among the plurality of configurations described in the examples.

<< Embodiment 3 >>
Hereinafter, the slot machine of the third embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 38 to 60. In principle, the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 38 to 60 are used only for the description of the present embodiment, and even when overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, the reference numerals are shown in the description of the present embodiment. Priority is given to the reference numerals 38 to 60. Moreover, each embodiment of this embodiment and each embodiment of other embodiments can be applied in combination with each other.

<Overall configuration>
The slot machine of the present embodiment starts rotation when a predetermined number of game media are loaded and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the acceptance of the rotation start instruction operation, the winning or not of the internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops the rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game medium is paid out and the game ends, and if they do not match, the game medium is used. It is a game table that progresses a series of games that end without paying out.

First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 38. FIG. 38 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 as viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 38 corresponds to an example of the game console of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. .. Inside the center of the main body 101, three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112) in which a plurality of types of symbols (not shown) are arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored and rotate inside the slot machine 100. It is configured to be able to. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a drive device such as a stepping motor.

In the present embodiment, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the strip-shaped member at equal intervals, and the strip-shaped members are attached to a predetermined circular tubular frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 113, so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player changes. That is, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols. As such a display device, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can be adopted in addition to the reel. Further, in the present embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

On the back surface of each of the reels 110 to 112, a backlight (not shown) for illuminating each symbol displayed on the symbol display window 113 is arranged. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be evenly illuminated. In the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor, not shown) including a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided in the vicinity of each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor is provided. It is configured so that a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the light receiving portion and the light receiving portion. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line. The winning line indicator lamp 120 is a lamp indicating a valid winning line 114.

For example, the notification lamp 123 informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a special combination (bonus)) has been internally won in the winning combination internal lottery described later, or that the bonus game is in progress. It is a lamp to inform you. The notification lamp 123 of the present embodiment is lit until the bonus game is completed after the bonus notification that the bonus confirmation is announced. The notification lamp 123 may be turned on before the bonus notification (at the time of the bonus or immediately before the bonus notification). The game medal insertable lamp 124 is a lamp for notifying the player that the game medal can be inserted. The re-game lamp 122 tells the player that the current game can be re-gamed (no need to insert a medal) when the re-game role, which is one of the winning roles in the previous game, is won. It is a lamp to inform you. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for staging.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (called credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In the present embodiment, each time the bet button 130 is pressed, a maximum of three bets are inserted, and when the bet button 132 is pressed, three bets are inserted (up to three). Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, the game start operation for notifying that the game start operation is possible. The lamp 121 lights up.

The chance button 196 is a button for directing.

The medal insertion slot 141 is an insertion slot for the player to insert medals at the start of the game. That is, the medals can be inserted electronically by pressing the bet buttons 130 to 132, or the actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 141, and the insertion means that both are included. be.

The stored number display 125 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) numerically. The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a prize. In the present embodiment, the stored number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are composed of a 7-segment (SEG) display. The payout number display 127 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated to operate the start lever 135, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called the game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-type push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started to rotate by operating the start lever 135, and are provided corresponding to the reels 110 to 112. ..

More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the left stop button 137, the middle reel 111 can be stopped by operating the middle stop button 138, and the right stop button 139 can be pressed. The right reel 112 can be stopped by operating it.

Further, illuminants 137a, 138a, 139a are provided inside each stop button 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the illuminants 137a, 138a, 139a are turned on. In addition to notifying the player, the light may be turned on when various notifications described later are performed.

Hereinafter, the operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation may be referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation may be referred to as the third stop reel.

Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 for stopping all the rotating reels 110 to 112 are stopped is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 as a stop operation is called "forward push operation order" or simply "forward push", and the operation order in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "forward push operation order". It is called "reverse push operation sequence" or simply "reverse push".

The medal return button 133 is a button for removing medals by pressing the button when the inserted medals are jammed. The checkout button 134 is a button for settling medals and bet medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and discharging them from the medal payout outlet 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole for inserting a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100. The medal payout outlet 155 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

At the bottom of the stop button unit 136, a title panel 162 for displaying the model name and attaching various certificate stamps is provided. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout outlet 155 and a medal tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting the sound of the speaker 277 provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The upper lamp 142 provided on the upper part of the front door 102 and the side lamps 144 provided on the left and right parts of the front door 102 are decorative lamps for enlivening the game and are lit when various notifications are performed. May cause you to.

An effect device 160 is arranged on the upper part of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 for outputting the sound of the speaker 272 provided above the inside of the slot machine 100 is provided on the upper part of the effect device 160. It is provided. The staging device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 composed of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a staging image display device 157 (illustrated) arranged behind the shutter 163. (Omitted, liquid crystal display device) is provided, and when the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally in front of the effect image display device 157, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 (not shown) is in front of the slot machine 100. It has a structure that appears on the (player side).

The effect image display device 157 of the present embodiment also functions as an operation navigation execution device for notifying information regarding a stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139), and displays for various notifications. May be done.

It should be noted that the display device is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device capable of displaying various production images and various game information. For example, a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, and a plasma display. , A reel (drum), or a display device including a projector and a screen may be used. Further, the display screen has a square shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Further, it is also possible to provide an ornament (not shown) on the peripheral edge of the display screen so that the display screen looks irregular as a result of a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen being hidden by the ornament. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is a flat surface, but may have a curved surface.

The notification lamp 123 is designed to notify predetermined information by causing the lamp to emit light, but the notification mode is not limited to the light emission of the lamp. For example, predetermined information may be displayed using a part of the area of the liquid crystal display device (in the case of a slot machine having a full liquid crystal display, an area near reels 110 to 112 may be used). Hereinafter, when the term "lighting of the notification lamp 123" is used, it is intended to include notification by another staging device (for example, a display device) having the same function.

<Inside the housing>
FIG. 39 is a front view showing the slot machine 100 in a state where the front door 102 is opened. The main body 101 is a box body that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and opens to the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that houses the main control board is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation port 249 provided at the upper part of the back plate 242, and the main control board storage case 210 Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. A sub-control board storage case 220 containing a sub-control board is disposed on the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side facing the main control board storage case 210. Further, an external centralized terminal plate 248 connected to the main control board and outputting information of the slot machine 100 to an external device is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side.

Further, inside the main body 101, a setting key switch (hereinafter, also referred to as “setting key SW”, which is not shown) that can be switched on and off by a rotation operation is provided. This setting key SW is an operation means for starting setting change and setting value confirmation of setting values (settings 1 to 6 in this example) described later. Further, inside the main body 101, a reset switch (hereinafter, also referred to as "reset SW") capable of performing an operation for changing a setting (setting value changing operation) by a pressing operation is provided. This reset SW is an operation means that also functions as an error release switch capable of performing an operation (error elimination operation) for eliminating various errors described later.

These setting key SW and reset SW are operating means provided at positions that can be operated only when the front door 102 is in the open state, and are difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is in the closed state. .. In other words, it is an operation means that can be operated only by the manager (clerk, etc.) of the game store, and is an operation means that the player cannot operate.

Further, inside the main body 101, a set value display device 101a (see FIG. 50 and the like) capable of displaying the set value is provided. In this example, the set value display device 101a is composed of a 7-segment display. Details will be described later, but when the setting change operation is performed, the setting value (any of setting 1 to setting 6) is displayed on the setting value display device 101a, and the setting is made by operating the start lever 135. When the value is confirmed, the set value is hidden. On the other hand, when the operation of confirming the set value is performed, the numerical value indicating the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a. The set value display device 101a is provided at a position where it can be visually recognized only when the front door 102 is in the open state, and it is difficult or impossible to visually recognize the set value display device 101a when the front door 102 is in the closed state.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals collected in a bucket) is arranged on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is arranged, and a power supply switch 244 is arranged on the front surface of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate in the closed state.

The power supply device 252 converts an AC power supply supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into a direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and converts each into a main control unit 300, a first sub control unit 400, a second sub control unit 500, and the like, which will be described later. It supplies to the control unit and each device. Further, a storage circuit (for example, a capacitor) for supplying power to a predetermined component (for example, RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the power supply from the outside is cut off is provided. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is arranged on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is arranged behind the medal auxiliary storage 240 (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection portion for connecting the power cord 265, and the power cord 265 connected to the power cord 265 extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 provided in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and is a door body that can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101.

In this example, the front door 102 locked in the closed state can be opened in the closed state by inserting the key held by the manager of the game store into the door key hole 140 (see FIG. 38). Therefore, the administrator can unlock the front door 102 (change from the closed state to the open state), but a person other than the administrator (for example, a player) cannot unlock the front door 102. ..

The side plate 260 on the right side of the main body 101 is provided with an optical open / close sensor (not shown) composed of a light emitting portion and a light receiving portion, and a front door is provided between the light emitting portion and the light receiving portion of the open / close sensor. It is configured to allow a light-shielding piece of a certain length provided in 102 to pass through.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of various sensors 318 including the open / close sensor in the main control timer interrupt process described later. When the front door 102 is in the closed state and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is blocked, the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state. For example, a low level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

On the other hand, when the front door 102 is in the open state and the light-shielding piece of the front door 102 moves to a position where the light from the light projecting portion of the open / close sensor of the main body 101 is not blocked, the open / close sensor indicates the open detection state. A signal (for example, a high-level signal) is output to the main control unit 300.

That is, the open / close sensor is a detection means capable of detecting the open / closed state of the front door (door body) 102, and when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the detection state is in the closed detection state and the front door 102 is in the open state. In the case of, the detection state becomes the open detection state. The configuration of the detection means is not limited to the optical sensor, and may be, for example, a magnetic sensor, a proximity switch, a micro switch, a Hall element, or the like. Further, it is not limited to the one in which the open detection state and the closed detection state are always switched according to the opening and closing of the door body, and even if the door body is in the open state, the detection state can be changed to the closed detection state. On the contrary, even if the door body is in the closed state, the detection state may be the one that can be changed to the open detection state.

An effect device 160, an effect control board (not shown) for controlling the effect device 160, and an upper speaker 272 are provided above the display window 113. At the lower part of the display window 113, a medal selector 170 for selecting inserted medals, a passage 266 through which medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops an illegal medal or the like onto the medal tray 161 are provided. .. Further, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

<Circuit configuration of control unit>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the slot machine 100 will be described with reference to FIG. 40. The figure is a circuit block diagram of the control unit.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game and a main effect according to a command signal (hereinafter, simply referred to as "command") transmitted by the main control unit 300. It is composed of a first sub-control unit 400 that controls the above, and a second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on a command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control unit>
First, the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and the basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used at the time of internal lottery of a winning combination, and a reel design. A ROM 306 that stores an array, stop position, etc., a RAM 308 that temporarily stores data, an I / O 310 that controls input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 312 that measures time, number of times, etc. , WDT (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this point is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Further, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency dividing data. It is determined and an interrupt request is transmitted to the CPU 304 every interrupt time. The CPU 304 monitors each sensor or the like and transmits a drive pulse in response to this interrupt request. For example, when the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the data for frequency division of ROM 306 is set to 47, the interrupt reference time is 256 × 47/8 MHz. = 1.504 ms.

The main control unit 300 starts when the power is turned on and the random number value generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates the numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on the clock signal input from the crystal oscillator 315a. A start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal) is provided, and the CPU 304 starts game control when a start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338 (starts main control unit main processing). do).

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 is inserted from various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal insertion slot 141) for each interruption time. Medal medal reception sensor, start lever 135 sensor, stop button 137 sensor, stop button 138 sensor, stop button 139 sensor, settlement button 134 sensor, medal payout sensor to be paid out from the medal payout device 180, index sensor of reel 110, The state of the index sensor of the reel 111, the index sensor of the reel 112, the open / close sensor, etc.) is monitored.

When the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, a signal indicating this detection is output to the random number value generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number value generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register storing the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal insertion slot 141, and detect whether or not the medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135, and detect a start operation by the player. The stop button 137 sensor, the stop button 138 sensor, and the stop button 139 sensor are installed in the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in the corresponding bet buttons 130 and 132, respectively, and are inserted when the medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 are inserted as medals to be inserted into the game. Is detected. The checkout button 134 sensor is provided on the checkout button 134. When the checkout button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals to be paid out by the medal payout device 180. Each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the reel 110, the index sensor of the reel 111, and the index sensor of the reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting bases of the reels 110 to 112, and each time the light-shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through, L Become a level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotation position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 is provided in the drive circuit 322 for driving the stepping motor provided on the reels 110 to 112, the drive circuit 324 for driving the solenoid provided in the medal selector 170 for selecting the inserted medals, and the medal payout device 180. Drive circuit 326 to drive the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, re-game lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number display) A drive circuit 328 for driving 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127) is provided, respectively.

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is slotted in an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via the information output circuit 334. The game information (for example, the game state) of the machine 100 is output.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 1300, and the voltage monitoring circuit 330 has a voltage value of the power supply set to a predetermined value (this implementation). In the embodiment, when the voltage is less than 9v), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub control unit 400, and enables communication with the first sub control unit 400. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 can transmit signals such as commands to the first sub control unit 400, but the first sub control A signal such as a command cannot be transmitted from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives a control command transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control command. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, and the like. is doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. Further, the first sub-control unit 400 stores a ROM 406 that stores a control program and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, a lighting pattern of the backlight, data for controlling various indicators, and the like. It is provided.

The CPU 404 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and sends an interrupt request to the CPU 404 for each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the sound source IC 418 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and the speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via the output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the sound output from the amplifier and the speakers 272 and 277 in response to a command from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is provided with various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, bet button) via an input / output interface. Lamps, chance button lamps, reel backlights, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 for driving the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. The drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided on the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, a sensor circuit 426 is provided in the first sub control unit 400, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 for each interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits / receives a signal to the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the staging image display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and bases the basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, and the like. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal having a predetermined period output by the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub control unit 500, data for displaying an image, and the like are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits the frequency dividing data stored in the predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received data for frequency division, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 for each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

The second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and the ROM 506 and the VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads out image data and the like stored in the ROM 506 based on the signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the staging image display device 157.

<Main control unit main processing>
Hereinafter, the main control unit main process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 41. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main processing of the main control unit.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which the start signal is input reset-starts by reset interruption and executes the main control unit main process according to the control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, various initial setting processes are performed in step S101. Details will be described later, but in this initial setting process, processing related to initial setting, setting change, return processing, and the like is performed.

In step S102, the medal insertion / start operation acceptance process is executed. Here, it is checked whether or not a medal has been inserted, and preparations are made for transmitting an insertion command indicating that a medal has been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. In addition, if you win a prize in the replay role in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game will be performed, and the replay will be in the replay state. No need to input. Further, it is checked whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if the start lever 135 is operated, the process proceeds to step S103.

In step S103, a winning line confirmation process is performed in which the number of inserted medals is determined and a valid winning line is determined.

In step S104, a random number acquisition process for acquiring a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is performed, and in the next step S105, a winning combination internal lottery process is performed. In this winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read according to the current gaming state, and an internal lottery is performed using this and the acquired random number value, and the result of this internal lottery is obtained. Preparations are made for transmitting the indicated internal lottery command to the first sub-control unit 400. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the winning combinations (including the operating combination) is internally won, the flag of the winning combination is turned on.

In step S106, a reel stop data selection process for selecting reel stop data is performed based on the internal lottery result of the winning combination internal lottery process. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300. Further, in step S106, preparations are made for transmitting a reel stop data command including information regarding the selected reel stop data to the first sub-control unit 400. In step S107, the reel rotation start processing is executed, and the rotation of all reels 110 to 112 is started.

In step S108, the reel stop control process is performed. In the reel stop control process, the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any of the stop buttons is pressed, the reel stop data stop table is displayed in order to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Refer to it and stop any of the reels 110 to 112 according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. When all reels 110 to 112 are stopped, the process proceeds to step S109.

In this step S108, preparations are made for transmitting a stop button reception command regarding the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been stopped for each stop operation to the first sub-control unit 400, and for each reel stop, preparations are made. Prepare to transmit a reel stop command regarding the reel stop position to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, a winning determination process for determining a winning is performed. In this winning combination processing, when a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made for transmitting a winning determination command indicating the result of the winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, the medal payout process is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination with a payout is won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is paid out according to the number of winning lines.

In step S111, the game state control process is performed. In this game state control process, processing related to the transition of each game state is performed, and the game state is transferred when the start condition or the end condition is satisfied. In addition, preparations are made for transmitting a game status command including information indicating the current game status.

With the above, one game is completed. After that, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-mentioned process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206) of the main control unit timer interrupt process described later.

<Initial setting process>
Next, with reference to FIG. 42, the initial setting process (step S101) in the main control unit main process described with reference to FIG. 41 will be described. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the initial setting process.

In step S201, the initial setting at startup is performed. In this initial setting at startup, the stack initial value is set (temporarily set) in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, the interrupt prohibition is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 308 are set, and the WDT314 is set. Allow the operation to and set the initial value.

In step S202, it is determined whether or not there is an abnormality in the RAM 308, and if there is an abnormality, the process proceeds to step S207 to execute the initialization process, and if there is no abnormality, the process proceeds to step S203.

In step S203, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state (door is open) based on the output from the open / close sensor. If the door is open, the process proceeds to step S204, and if the door is not open, the process proceeds to step S204. Proceeds to step S205 to execute the return process. Further, in step S204, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. If it is ON, the process proceeds to step S206 to execute the setting change process, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S205 to execute the return process. ..

In the return process of step S205, a process of returning the slot machine 100 to the state before the power failure (for example, a process of returning the return data saved in the RAM 308 in the power cut process of step S411 of the main control unit timer interrupt process). Etc.), and then end the initial setting process.

In step S206, after performing the setting change process, the process proceeds to step S207. Details will be described later, but in this setting change process, processing related to the setting change and the like are performed.

In step S207, the initialization process is performed. In this initialization process, after executing a process for initializing the data of the RAM 308 (RAM clear), a process related to the initial operation, and the like, the initial setting process is terminated.

<Setting change processing>
Next, the setting change process (step S206) in the initial setting process described with reference to FIG. 42 will be described with reference to FIG. 43. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process.

In step S301, a process of initializing the data of RAM 308 (RAM clear) is performed, and in the next step S302, a setting change start command indicating to start setting change is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives this setting change start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of starting the display of the management screen.

In step S303, the current set value is displayed using the set value display device 101a. For example, if the current set value is the setting 6, the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed.

In step S304, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported error in the state in which some error is detected (hereinafter, each error detection state), and if there is such an error, step S. If not, the process proceeds to S305, and if not, the process proceeds to step S306.

Examples of the error handled in this embodiment include a hopper empty error, a medal insertion abnormality 1 (medal selector error), a medal insertion abnormality 2 to 4, a medal payout abnormality 1 to 3, an overflow abnormality, a RAM defect, and a winning abnormality. Hereinafter, these errors will be described. Although the door opening (door open error) is not treated as an error, it may be treated as an error.

The hopper empty error (hopper error) is a payout error related to the payout of medals, and occurs when the number of medals stored in the hopper housed inside the main body 101 becomes less than the specified number (error detection state). .. The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating the error canceling switch (reset SW in this example) after replenishing the hopper with a specified number of medals or more (after the error is not detected).

The medal insertion error 1 (selector error) occurs when the inserted medal stays in the medal selector or the like (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating the error release switch (reset SW in this example) after removing the cause of the error (after the error is not detected). The medal insertion abnormality 2 occurs when the number of medals inserted is equal to or greater than the specified number (error is detected), and is resolved by changing the set value or clearing the RAM.

The medal insertion abnormality 3 occurs when either the insertion sensor 1 or the insertion sensor 2 is turned on other than during the medal insertion process (error detection state). The medal insertion abnormality 4 occurs when the inserted medal does not normally pass through the insertion sensor 1 and the insertion sensor 2 (error detection state). The error notification for these errors can be canceled by operating the error canceling switch (reset SW in this example) after removing the cause of the error (after the error is not detected).

The medal payout abnormality 1 occurs when the medal payout is not paid out for a certain period of time when the medal payout device is driven (error detection state). The medal payout abnormality 2 occurs when medals stay while driving the medal payout device (error detection state). The medal payout abnormality 3 occurs when either the payout sensor 1 or the payout sensor 2 is turned on except during the medal payout process (error detection state). The error notification for these errors can be canceled by operating the error canceling switch (reset SW in this example) after removing the cause of the error (after the error is not detected).

The overflow error occurs when the overflow terminal of the medal auxiliary storage is turned on (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating the error release switch (reset SW in this example) after removing the cause of the error (after the error is not detected). RAM failure occurs when an abnormality is detected by checking the RAM (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating the error release switch (reset SW in this example). The winning abnormality occurs when a winning symbol different from the winning symbol confirmed by the internal lottery is won after the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (error detection state). The error notification for this error can be canceled by operating the error release switch (reset SW in this example).

The game console according to the present invention is not limited to the slot machine, and can be applied to a pachinko machine. Errors that can occur in the pachinko machine include, for example, a bottom pan full tank error, a payout device error, a payout excess error, an illegal payout error, a main control unit communication error, a magnetic error, a magnetic field error, a frame opening error, and a RAM clear error. , Impact sensor error, etc., and error notification for these errors can also be canceled by operating the error canceling switch after removing the cause of the error.

In step S305, the error notification start process is executed. In this error notification start processing, the main control unit 300 displays an error code on the payout number display 127 and transmits an error notification start command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub control unit 400. If a plurality of errors are detected in displaying the error code on the payout number display 127, the error code for one of the error notifications is displayed on the payout number display 127 according to the priority order. Further, when the code corresponding to the door open is displayed on the payout number display 127, the display of the error code has priority.

In step S306, it is determined whether or not the reset SW has been operated, and if there is an operation, the process proceeds to step S307, and if there is no operation, the process proceeds to step S311.

In step S307, the current set value is changed. Specifically, 1 is added and updated (returns to 1 in the case of 6) with respect to the currently set values 1 to 6.

In step S308, it is determined whether or not some error notification is being executed (each error notification is in progress), the process proceeds to step S309 if each error notification is in progress, and step S311 if each error notification is not in progress. move on.

In step S309, it is determined whether or not the error notification end condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S310, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S311. In the present embodiment, the error notification end condition is obtained when the cause of the error currently being notified has been eliminated (error non-detection state) and the error notification execution period exceeds the period for one cycle of the error sound. Is determined to hold. In the present embodiment, an error sound is output for error notification, but this error sound includes an announcement voice for notifying the content of the error, and the above condition is that this announcement voice is output at least once for error notification. It is intended to be done. With this configuration, the content of the error can be notified to the outside more reliably.

In step S310, error notification end processing is executed. In this error notification end processing, the error notification currently being executed is terminated. Specifically, the error code displayed on the payout number display 127 is erased, the error notification end command is transmitted, and the error display on the 7-segment (SEG) display is terminated. If multiple errors are detected, the above processing is executed for the error with the highest priority, and the unprocessed state is maintained for the other errors (only one error is notified). Target of termination). If there is an error that has not been processed, the error code corresponding to the error having the highest priority is displayed on the payout number display 127.

In step S311, it is determined whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated, and if there is an operation, the process proceeds to step S312, and if there is no operation, the process proceeds to step S304.

In step S312, the set value displayed on the set value display device 101a is stored in the RAM 308 as a new set value (the set value is confirmed), and in the next step S313, the display of the set value display device 101a is erased. And hide the setting value.

In this example, the set value is determined when the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted, but the front door 102 is opened by adding the determination process of whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state. It may be configured to confirm the set value only in the case of the state. In this case, when the front door 102 is in the closed state, the set value cannot be determined, but the display of the management screen may be continued.

In step S314, it is determined whether or not there is an unreported error in each error detection state, and if there is such an error, the process proceeds to step S315, and if not, the process proceeds to step S316. ..

In step S315, the same process as in step S305 is executed.

In step S316, it is determined whether or not the reset SW has been operated, and if there is an operation, the process proceeds to step S317, and if there is no operation, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S317, it is determined whether or not each error is being notified, and if each error is being notified, the process proceeds to step S318, and if each error is not being notified, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S318, it is determined whether or not the error notification end condition is satisfied, and if the condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S319, and if the condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S320.

In step S319, the same processing as in step S310 is executed.

In step S320, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S314, and if it is OFF, the process proceeds to step S321. In step S321, a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is ended is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the setting change end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. 44. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the timer interrupt process of the main control unit.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in the present embodiment), and the timer interrupt signal is used as a trigger for the main control unit timer interrupt. The process is started in a predetermined cycle.

In step S401, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving the value of each register of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed.

In step S402, the WDT314 is periodically (this) so that the count value of the WDT314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and WDT interruption does not occur (so as not to detect an abnormality in processing). In the embodiment, the restart is performed once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of interrupting the timer of the main control unit.

In step S403, the input port state update process is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input via the input port of the I / O 310 to monitor the presence or absence of the detection signals, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each of the various sensors 318. It is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S404, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S405, the timer update process is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in each time unit.

In step S406, the command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub control unit 400, the command type included in the received output schedule information enables the determination of the effect control according to the change in the game control in the main control unit 300, and is included in the output schedule information. It becomes possible to determine the effect control content based on the information of the command data.

In step S407, the external output signal setting process is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S408, device monitoring processing is performed. Details will be described later, but in this device monitoring process, setting value confirmation processing, door opening monitoring processing, settlement processing, and the like are performed.

In step S409, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is on. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S411, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S410.

In step S410, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt end process are performed. In this timer interrupt end process, a process of setting the value of each register temporarily saved in step S401 to each of the original registers is performed, and the process returns to the main control unit main process.

On the other hand, in step S411, information that needs to be saved, such as a specific variable for returning to the state at the time of power failure at the time of power recovery and a stack pointer, is saved as recovery data in a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. The checksum value for at least a predetermined area to be included is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and the power supply flag indicating that the power failure processing has been performed is set to ON.

<Device monitoring process>
Next, the device monitoring process (step S408) in the main control unit timer interrupt process described with reference to FIG. 44 will be described with reference to FIG. 45. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of device monitoring processing.

In step S501, the process proceeds to step S502 after performing the set value confirmation process. Details will be described later, but in this setting value confirmation process, processing related to setting value confirmation is performed. In step S502, the door opening monitoring process is performed.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open / close sensor in the door opening monitoring process, and when it detects a signal indicating that it is in the opening detection state, the main control unit 300 sends the opening detection information indicating that the front door 102 has been opened to the RAM 308. Along with storing, a code indicating door open is displayed on the payout number display 127, and preparations are made for transmitting a door open detection command indicating that the opening of the front door 102 has been detected to the first sub-control unit 400. When an error is detected, the error code is prioritized for the display of the payout number display 127.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open / close sensor in the door opening monitoring process, and when it detects a signal indicating that the door is in the closed detection state, the main control unit 300 sends the closing detection information indicating that the front door 102 is closed to the RAM 308. In addition to storing, the code indicating the door open displayed on the payout number display 127 is erased, and the door closure detection command indicating that the front door 102 is closed is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. Get ready.

In step S503, after performing the settlement process, the process proceeds to step S504. In this settlement process, the main control unit 300 monitors the state of the settlement button 134 sensor during the valid period of the settlement button 134 (for example, the period from when the game can be started until the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted). When a signal indicating that the settlement button 134 has been operated is detected, the electronically stored medals are settled, and the settlement command indicating that the medals are settled is executed as the first sub-control. Prepare for transmission to unit 400.

In step S504, the device monitoring process is terminated after performing other device monitoring processing. Details will be described later, but in other device monitoring processes, error notification start processing, error notification end processing, and the like are performed.

<Set value confirmation process>
Next, the set value confirmation process (step S501) in the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 46. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the set value confirmation process.

In step S601, it is determined whether or not the set value is being confirmed, and if the set value is being confirmed, the process proceeds to step S606, and if the set value is not being confirmed, the process proceeds to step S602. In step S602, it is determined whether or not the set value confirmation valid period is in effect, the process proceeds to step S603 in the case of the set value confirmation valid period, and the set value confirmation process is terminated in the case of not the set value confirmation valid period.

Here, the set value confirmation valid period is not a MAX bet state (a state in which one game can be started (three in this example) of medals is bet, or a replay state in which a game is replayed), but an opening / closing state. This is the period during which the sensor is not in the closed detection state and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating and the error is not being notified.

The conditions relating to the set value confirmation valid period are not all of the above conditions, but may be any of the above conditions or any of a plurality of the above conditions. Further, in the above condition, there is a condition that "it is not in the MAX bet state", but it may be "not in the bet state".

In step S603, it is determined whether the setting key SW is ON or OFF. If it is OFF, the set value confirmation process is terminated, and if it is ON, the process proceeds to step S604. In step S604, the current setting value is displayed using the setting value display device 101a. For example, if the current setting value is setting 6, the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed. In the next step S605, preparations are made for transmitting a set value confirmation start command indicating that the set value confirmation is started to the first sub-control unit 400. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the set value confirmation start command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of starting the display of the management screen.

In step S606 during confirmation of the set value, it is determined whether or not the door is closed (the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state), and if the door is closed, the process proceeds to step S608, and if the door is not closed, the process proceeds to step S607. ..

In step S607 during setting value confirmation, it is determined whether the setting key SW is OFF or ON. If it is ON, the setting value confirmation process is terminated in order to continue the setting value confirmation, and if it is OFF, the step is taken. Proceed to S608. In step S608, the display of the set value display device 101a is erased and the set value is hidden, and in the next step S609, a set value confirmation end command indicating that the set value confirmation is ended is sent to the first sub-control unit 400. Get ready to send. When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the set value confirmation end command from the main control unit 300, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the display of the management screen.

<Other device monitoring processing>
Next, another device monitoring process (step S504) in the device monitoring process described with reference to FIG. 45 will be described with reference to FIG. 47. The figure is a flowchart showing the flow of other device monitoring processes.

In step S701, it is determined whether or not each error is detected (see the description in step S304). If the error is not detected, other device monitoring processes are terminated, and if each error is detected, the other device monitoring process is terminated. Goes to step S702.

In step S702, it is determined whether or not the error notification is possible period, if it is not the error notification possible period, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and if it is the error notification possible period, the process proceeds to step S703.

Here, the error notification possible period is a period during which the setting is not being changed and any of the reels 110 to 112 is not rotating.

In step S703, it is determined whether or not each error is being notified, and if each error is not being notified, the process proceeds to step S704, and if each error is being notified, the process proceeds to step S705.

In step S704, the error notification start processing (similar to step S305) is executed.

In step S705, it is determined whether or not the front door 102 is in the open state (door is open). If the door is not open, other device monitoring processing is terminated, and if the door is open, step S706 is performed. Proceed to.

In step S706, it is determined whether or not the reset SW has been operated, and if there is an operation, the process proceeds to step S707, and if there is no operation, other device monitoring processes are terminated.

In step S707, it is determined whether or not the error notification end condition is satisfied, and if the error notification end condition is not satisfied, other device monitoring processing is terminated and the error notification end condition (similar to step S309). If is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S708.

In step S708, error notification end processing is executed (similar to step S310).

<Processing of the first sub-control unit 400>
Next, the process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 48. Note that FIG. 48A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 48B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 48C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S801, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is performed when the power is turned on. In this process, the initial setting of the input / output port, the initialization process of the storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed. In this process, the RAM 408 is provided with an area for storing the internal winning information, which is information representing the result of the internal winning, and an area for storing the information representing the gaming state, respectively.

In step S803, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S805.

In step S805, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S807, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed. Here, among the processes corresponding to this command process, the outline of the process at the time of setting change, the process at the time of confirming the set value, the process corresponding to the state of the open / close sensor, and the process related to error detection will be described.

The main control unit 300 transmits a setting change start command to the first sub control unit 400 when the setting change is started (step S302 in FIG. 43), and sends a setting change end command to the first sub control unit 400 when the setting change is completed. (Step S321 in FIG. 43). When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the setting change start command, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emitting mode, and the setting change sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). .. Further, the management screen is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. The management screen is a screen used by an administrator such as a clerk of a game store to make various settings related to the slot machine 100, and in this embodiment, various settings can be made by using a cross-shaped button (not shown). It has become. Moreover, when the setting change end command is received, the above-mentioned various outputs are terminated.

The main control unit 300 sends a set value confirmation start command to the first sub control unit 400 when the set value confirmation is started (step S605 in FIG. 46), and a set value confirmation end command is sent to the first sub control unit 400 when the set value confirmation is completed. It is transmitted to the sub-control unit 400 (step S609 in FIG. 46). When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the set value confirmation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 displays the management screen in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. When the set value confirmation end command is received, the display of the management screen on the liquid crystal display device 157 is terminated.

The main control unit 300 monitors the state of the open / close sensor, and when it detects a signal indicating that it is in the open detection state, it sends a door open detection command to the first sub control unit 400 and sends a signal indicating that it is in the closed detection state. When it is detected, a door closing detection command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S502 in FIG. 45). When the first sub-control unit 400 receives the door opening detection command, the first sub-control unit 400 stores the opening detection information (in this example, the information indicating "opening" and the opening date and time) in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order, and also opens the door. Execute the process to start the notification. On the other hand, when the door closing detection command is received, the closing detection information (in this example, the information indicating "closed" and the date and time of closing) is stored in the RAM 408 as history information in chronological order, and the door opening notification is terminated. Executes the processing of.

In the present embodiment, as a door opening notification, a light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) is emitted in an open light emitting mode, and an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is being opened") is emitted from the sound output means (speakers 272,277). Is output. The mode of the door opening notification is not particularly limited, and for example, the character string "door is opening" may be displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157.

When the main control unit 300 detects an error, it sends an error notification start command corresponding to the detected error to the first sub control unit 400 (step S305 in FIG. 43, step S315, step S704 in FIG. 47) to release the error. When the operation is performed, the error notification end command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S310 in FIG. 43, step S319, step S708 in FIG. 47).

The first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of starting error notification when an error notification start command is received. In this example, when a selector error occurs, a character string such as "Selector error has occurred !!" and a character "Call a game clerk." Are displayed in the display area of the display means (liquid crystal display device 157). A line is displayed, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are emitted in an error emission mode, and an error sound ("An error has occurred. Please call a game clerk" is heard from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). ) Is output. The mode of error notification is not particularly limited, and for example, error notification may be performed by the movement of the movable means (reels 110 to 112). In executing error notification in the sound output means and the light emitter, if a plurality of errors are detected, error notification for one of them is executed according to the priority.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of ending the error notification when the error notification end command is received. When executing error notification in the sound output means and the light emitter, if multiple errors are detected, the process of ending the error notification for the error with the higher priority is executed, and other than that. The unprocessed state is maintained for errors (only one error is the target of notification termination). If there is an error that has not been processed, error notification corresponding to the error with the highest priority is executed.

The above error notification is executed with priority over the notification associated with the door opening, but the error notification changes when the door is opened, for example, the volume of the error sound is lowered (or not output) when the door is opened. It may be configured to do so. In addition, the execution of error notification is restricted while the setting change process is being executed or the setting value is being confirmed.

In step S809, the staging control process is performed. Here, the process of expanding the effect data and setting the device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, the process of setting the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and the received command. Based on the information contained in the command and the command, the staging data is set and the control process is executed. The effect data set in the effect reservation area and the device data set in the effect execution area may be updated (overwritten) with other data. In this case, the effect content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S811, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418 to execute the effect by sound.

In step S813, the lamp control process is performed based on the process result of step S809. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the various lamps 420, and the acquired control data is output to the drive circuit 422 to execute the effect by the lamp.

In step S815, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S809. For example, control data is acquired from the device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the shutter 163, and the acquired control data is output to the drive circuit 424 to execute the effect by the shutter 163.

In step S817, information output processing is performed in which a control command is set to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S809. For example, if there is device data set in the effect execution area corresponding to the effect image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S803.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output by the main control unit 300. In step S821 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the timer interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. 48 (c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt in a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S831, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S803 in the first sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 48 (a) and stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S803, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S833, device data is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S815, and the effect random number value is updated.

<Processing of the second sub control unit 500>
Next, the process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 49. Note that FIG. 49A is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 49B is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 49 (c) is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 49 (d) is a flowchart of the image control process of the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S901 of FIG. 49 (a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, the initialization process is first executed in step S901. In this initialization process, input / output port initial setting, initialization process of a storage area in RAM 508, and the like are performed.

In step S903, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905.

In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S907, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether or not a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S909, the effect control process is performed. Specifically, when there is a new command in step S907, the process corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading the effect data for controlling the image of the background image from the ROM 506 is executed. In addition, processing such as reading out the production data from ROM 506 other than this is included, and when the production data needs to be updated, the production data is updated.

In step S911, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S909. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S909, the image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding a display image (notification image, background image) is executed. This image control process will be described later with reference to FIG. 49 (d). When this image control process is completed, the process returns to step S903.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (b). This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S915 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and the timer interrupt process is predetermined with this timer interrupt as an opportunity. Execute in the cycle of.

In step S917, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 in the second sub-control unit main process shown in FIG. 49 (a), and the data is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

In step S919, the effect random value value is updated.

Next, the image control process of step S911 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. 49 (d). The figure is a diagram showing a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S921, an instruction to transfer image data is given. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the designation of the display area A of the VRAM 518 and the drawing area of the display area B. As a result, the one-frame image stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets the ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 518), and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then the image from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518. Set the command to instruct the start of data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers the image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on the instruction set in the attribute register. After that, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S923, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S925. If not, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. Wait for it.

In step S925, parameters are set based on the effect scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S921, the CPU 504 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis of the VRAM 518, image size). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates), image superposition and transparency, etc.) are instructed to VDP516. The VDP 516 sets parameters according to the attributes based on the instructions stored in the attribute registers.

In step S927, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to the instruction of the CPU 504.

In step S929, it is determined whether or not the generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of drawing the image is input, and if the generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S931, and if not, the generation end interrupt signal. Wait for to be entered.

In step S931, the scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images are generated is incremented (+1) to end the process.

≪Explanation of operation example≫
Hereinafter, an operation example of the slot machine 100 described above will be described.

[Operation example when setting change is executed]
Hereinafter, an example in which the setting change is executed using FIG. 50A will be described.

First, FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (1) show a state in which the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 in the power-off state is opened, and the setting key SW is turned on by the manager of the game store. .. When the power is off, the light emitters (various lamps 420, etc.) are turned off, the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) are in a non-output state, and the display means (effect image display device). 157) is in a hidden state.

Next, FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (2) show a state when the power is turned on from the state shown in FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (1) and the power is turned on. When the power is turned on while the setting key SW is ON, the slot machine 100 executes the setting change process (step S206 in FIG. 42) and shifts to a state in which the set value can be changed (setting change mode). It is configured in.

In this setting change process, a setting change start command is transmitted (step S302 in FIG. 43), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Then, a process is executed in which the light emitting body (various lamps 420 and the like) emits light in an open light emitting mode, and the effect image display device 157 displays the management screen (step S807 in FIG. 48). Further, a process of displaying the current set value (step S303 in FIG. 43) is executed using the set value display device 101a. In FIGS. 50A and 50A, the setting value display device 101a shows that the number 6 indicating the setting 6 is displayed.

During the execution of the setting change process (setting change mode), each time the reset SW operation is detected, the value of the currently set setting value is added and updated by 1 in the range of 1 to 6, and the setting value is changed. When it exceeds 6, the set value can be changed by repeatedly executing the process of returning to 1 (step S307 in FIG. 43). FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (3) show that the reset SW has been operated and that the number 1 indicating the setting 1 changed by this operation is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. ing.

Further, by operating the start lever 135, the set value is fixed, and the display on the set value display device 101a is hidden (steps S311 to S313 in FIG. 43). 50 (A) and 50 (4) show the state when the start lever 135 is operated from the state of FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (3). If the setting key is in the OFF state after the start lever 135 is operated, this setting change process ends (step S320 in FIG. 43). At this time, a setting change end command indicating that the setting change is terminated is transmitted (step S321 in FIG. 43), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command ends various outputs during the setting change (FIG. FIG. 48 step S807).

Immediately after the setting change is completed, since the open / close sensor is in the open detection state, the door open detection command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 (step S502 in FIG. 45). Upon receiving this command, the first sub-control unit 400 emits a light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) in an open light emitting mode as a door opening notification, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) emits an opening sound (for example, ". The voice) "The door is open" is output. FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (5) show a state in which the door opening notification is executed. The state when the setting key is turned off is shown. In this state, the player is waiting for the start of the game, and the effect image display device 157 executes a process of displaying the customer waiting effect (step S807 in FIG. 48).

[Operation example when setting value confirmation is executed]
Hereinafter, an example in which the set value confirmation is executed using FIG. 50 (B) will be described.

First, in FIGS. 50 (B) and 50 (1), in the slot machine 100 in the power-on state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (waiting for the start of the game by the player), and the light emitter (various lamps 420). Etc.) emit light in the customer waiting light emitting mode, the customer waiting BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 shows a state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed.

Next, FIGS. 50 (B) and 50 (2) show the state when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state from the state shown in FIGS. 50 (B) and 50 (1). ing. In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs an open sound from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277), and the light emitter (light emitter (step S502)). A process of emitting light from various lamps (420, etc.) in an open light emission mode is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). As for the display on the effect image display device 157, the state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed is maintained.

Further, it is assumed that the setting key SW is turned on from the state shown in FIGS. 50 (B) and 50 (2). FIGS. 50 (B) and 50 (3) show the state at this time. The slot machine 100 is configured to be in a state where the current set value can be confirmed (set value confirmation mode) by turning on the setting key SW (Yes in step S603 of FIG. 46). Judgment). In this state, the process of displaying the current set value (step S604 in FIG. 46) is executed using the set value display device 101a. In FIGS. 50 (B) and 50 (3), the setting value display device 101a shows that the number 1 indicating the setting 1 is displayed. Further, a set value confirmation start command is transmitted (step S605 in FIG. 46), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command executes a process of displaying the management screen on the staging image display device 157. (Steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48). The output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) maintains the open sound, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting body (various lamps 420 and the like) is maintained in the open light emitting mode. The content displayed on the staging image display device 157 is configured to display the same screen as in the setting change mode, but even if it is configured to display a screen different from that in the setting change mode. good.

Further, it is assumed that the setting key SW is turned off from the state shown in FIGS. 50 (B) and 50 (3). FIGS. 50 (B) and 50 (4) show the state at this time. The slot machine 100 is configured to end the state in which the current set value can be confirmed (set value confirmation mode) by turning off the setting key SW (in step S607 of FIG. 46). Judgment of Yes). In this case, the display on the set value display device 101a is hidden (step S608 in FIG. 46). Further, a control command for completing the setting value confirmation is transmitted (step S609 in FIG. 46), and the first sub-control unit 400 receiving this command ends the display of the management screen on the staging image display device 157 and waits for the customer. The process of displaying the effect is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Since the open / close sensor remains in the open detection state in the states of FIGS. 50 (B) and 50 (4), the output of the open sound from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277) is maintained, and the light emitter (various lamps 420) is maintained. Etc.), the light emitting mode is maintained as the open light emitting mode.

[Operation example when the front door 102 is closed during setting change execution]
In the above [operation example when the setting change is executed], the operation in the state where the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened has been described. Hereinafter, an example in which the front door 102 is closed during the execution of setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (A).

First, the states of FIGS. 51 (A) (1) and 51 (A) (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 50 (A) (1) and 50 (A) (2), respectively. Further, FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (3) show a state when the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state from the state shown in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (2). Further, FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (4) show a state when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state from the state shown in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (3). ..

During the execution of the setting change processing (setting change mode), the state is not changed by the signal from the open / close sensor before the start of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit. That is, the execution state of the setting change process is maintained, and even if the front door 102 is closed during the execution of the setting change process as shown in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (3), the setting change process is executed. The state will be maintained. Further, by opening the front door 102 again, the state shown in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (4) (the same state as in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (2)) can be obtained, and the setting can be changed. Further, not only the execution state of the setting change process but also the state of the light emitting body (various lamps 420 and the like), the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 are maintained. 51 (A) (3) and 51 (A) (4) show that the state of the device remains unchanged. When the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, the display on the set value display device 101a may be hidden.

[Operation example when the front door 102 is closed while checking the set value]
In the above [operation example when the setting value confirmation is executed], the operation in the state where the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is opened has been described. Hereinafter, an example in which the front door 102 is closed while the set value confirmation is being executed will be described with reference to FIG. 51 (B).

First, the states of FIGS. 51 (B) (1) and 51 (B) (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 50 (B) (1) and 50 (B) (3), respectively. Further, FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (3) show a state when the front door 102 is in the closed state and the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state from the state shown in FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (2). Further, FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (4) show a state when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state from the state shown in FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (3). ..

While the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation mode), when the signal from the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, the set value confirmation mode is configured to end in the same way as when the setting key is turned off. (Yes determination in step S606 of FIG. 46). FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (3) show that the display on the set value display device 101a is hidden because the set value confirmation mode is terminated while the setting key is ON. .. Further, it is shown that the state is the same as in FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (1) except for the state of the setting key.

When the front door 102 is opened again from the state of FIGS. 51 (B) and 51 (3), the set value confirmation mode is started again because the setting key is already in the ON state (FIG. 46). Yes determination in step S603). 51 (B) (4) shows that the state is the same as that shown in FIGS. 51 (B) (2).

[Operation example when the setting key SW is ON (1)]
In the above [Operation example when the front door 102 is closed during the setting value confirmation execution], it has been described that the setting value confirmation mode ends when the front door 102 is closed while the setting key is ON. In this state, it is possible to play the game while the setting key is ON.

On the other hand, when the setting key is ON, the set value confirmation mode can be restarted by opening the front door 102 during the set value confirmation valid period, but other than the set value confirmation valid period. It is configured so that the set value confirmation mode is not started during the period of. Hereinafter, a specific description will be given using the example of FIG. 52 (A).

First, in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (1), in the slot machine 100 in the power-on state, the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (during the game), and the light emitters (various lamps 420 and the like) emit light during the game. Light is emitted in an embodiment, the BGM during the game is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 shows a state in which the effect during the game is displayed. The front door 102 is in the closed state, the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the setting key SW is in the ON state. This state is a state in which the game is performed after the front door 102 is closed in the state where the set value confirmation mode is executed.

FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (2) show a state when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state from the state shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (1). Here, since the reels 110 to 112 are rotating (during the game) and are not in the set value confirmation valid period, the set value confirmation mode is not executed (No determination in step S602 of FIG. 46). In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs an open sound from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277), and the light emitter (light emitter (step S502)). A process of emitting light from various lamps (420, etc.) in an open light emission mode is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). As for the display on the effect image display device 157, the state in which the effect during the game is displayed is maintained.

Since the set value confirmation mode cannot be executed in the state of FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (2), it is necessary to end the game at least once in order to execute the set value confirmation mode. In FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (3), the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (2) to return to the state shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (1), and then the stop button 137 is further formed. The state when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped by operating ~ 139 is shown. In this example, the bell is won, and the state in which the winning of the bell is displayed in the in-game effect of the effect image display device 157 is shown. At this time, the light emitting body (various lamps 420 and the like) and the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277) perform an effect according to the bell winning.

In the following FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (4), the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (A) and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state is shown. Since the set value confirmation valid period is in this state, the set value confirmation mode is started again (yes determination in step S603 of FIG. 46). 52 (A) and 52 (4) show that the state is the same as that shown in FIGS. 51 (B) (2) and 51 (B) (4). When the replay is won in FIGS. 52 (A) and 52 (3), the set value confirmation is not valid even when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. Therefore, the set value is set even when the front door 102 is opened. Confirmation mode does not start.

[Operation example when the setting key SW is ON (2)]
In the above [Operation example (1) when the setting key SW is ON], an example in which the setting value confirmation mode is not started in a period other than the setting value confirmation valid period even if the setting key is ON will be described. did. Further, in the following, an example different from FIG. 52 (A) will be specifically described with reference to FIG. 52 (B).

First, FIGS. 52 (B) and 52 (1) show a state in which three medals are bet on the slot machine 100 in the power-on state (in the inserted state, before the start of the game), and a light emitter (various lamps 420). Etc.) emit light in a light emitting mode during the game, the BGM during the game is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 shows a state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed. The front door 102 is in the closed state, the open / close sensor is in the closed detection state, and the setting key SW is in the ON state. In this state, the front door 102 is closed while the set value confirmation mode is executed, and then the bet operation for starting the game is performed.

FIGS. 52 (2) and 52 (2) show a state when the front door 102 is in the open state and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state from the state shown in FIGS. 52 (B) and 52 (1). Here, since the set value confirmation mode is not executed because the three medals are bet (inserted state) and the set value confirmation valid period is not executed (No determination in step S602 of FIG. 46). In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs an open sound from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277), and the light emitter (light emitter (step S502)). A process of emitting light from various lamps (420, etc.) in an open light emission mode is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). As for the display on the effect image display device 157, the state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed is maintained.

Since the set value confirmation mode cannot be executed in the state of FIGS. 52 (B) and 52 (2), in order to execute the set value confirmation mode, the input state is canceled by playing a game or operating the settlement button 134. It is necessary to do (make it non-input state). In FIGS. 52 (B) and 52 (3), the front door 102 is closed from the state shown in FIGS. 52 (B) and (2) to return to the state shown in FIGS. The state when it is in the non-input state by operating is shown.

In the following FIGS. 52 (B) (4), the state when the front door 102 is opened from the state shown in FIGS. 52 (B) (3) and the open / close sensor is in the open detection state is shown. Since the set value confirmation valid period is in this state, the set value confirmation mode is started again (yes determination in step S603 of FIG. 46). 52 (B) (4) shows that the state is the same as that shown in FIGS. 51 (B) (2) and 51 (B) (4).

[Operation example of error notification and error cancellation (1)]
Hereinafter, an example of the case where the error cancellation is executed using FIG. 53 (A) will be described.

First, FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (1) show a state in which a selector error is detected in the slot machine 100 in the power-on state. In this case, an error code (“CE” corresponding to the selector error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the error notification start command outputs an error sound for notifying the selector error from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) corresponds to the selector error. A process of emitting light in an error light emitting mode and displaying a screen for notifying a selector error on the effect image display device 157 is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48).

Subsequently, FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (2) show a state in which the selector error of FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (1) is detected and a hopper error is further detected. That is, at this point, two types of errors have been detected. When such a plurality of errors are detected, the payout number display 127 displays an error code for one of the errors in order of priority. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the payout number display 127 displays the selector error. Further, an error notification start command corresponding to the hopper error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47), and the first sub-control unit 400 receiving the error notification start command executes the error notification. Here, when a plurality of errors are detected in the sound output means or the light emitter, the error notification for one of the errors is executed according to the priority. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the error sound from the sound output means (speaker 272,277) and the error emission mode in the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.). All correspond to selector errors. On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, in addition to the selector error currently being notified, a process of displaying the screen for notifying the hopper error is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48).

From the state where the two types of errors described in FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (2) are detected, the front door 102 is opened to eliminate these errors (error non-detection state), and the reset switch is further canceled to cancel the error notification. Is pressed once. FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (3) show the state at this time. When the cause of the error notification is removed and the error detection state is resolved, the error notification can be canceled by operating the reset SW (Yes determination in step S706 of FIG. 47, step S708). However, if multiple errors are detected, the error notification of one of them is canceled according to the priority, and the error notification is newly executed for the other errors (only one error ends the notification). subject). In FIGS. 53A and 53A, it is shown that the error notification for the selector error is canceled and the error notification for the remaining hopper error is executed. Specifically, an error code (“HO” corresponding to the hopper error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error sound for notifying the hopper error is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). , A light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) is emitted in an error light emitting mode corresponding to the hopper error, and a screen for notifying the hopper error is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

Further, it is assumed that the reset SW is pressed once in order to cancel the remaining error notification in the state of FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (3). FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (4) show the state at this time. When the cause of the error notification is removed and the error detection state is resolved, the error notification can be canceled by operating the reset SW (Yes determination in step S706 of FIG. 47, step S708). In FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (4), it is shown that the error notification regarding the hopper error is canceled. Further, in this case, since the open sensor is in the open detection state, the code indicating the door open (“dr” in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127. Further, when the door opening detection command is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, the opening sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272,277), and the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in the open light emitting mode. It will be in the state of. In addition, in the effect image display device 157, a state in which a customer waiting effect is displayed is shown.

[Operation example of error notification and error cancellation (2)]
In the above [Operation example of error notification and error cancellation (1)], the case where a hopper error occurs after a selector error occurs has been described, but even if the order of occurrence is reversed, the same operation is performed for error cancellation. Become. Hereinafter, an example of this case will be described with reference to FIG. 53 (B).

First, FIGS. 53 (B) and 53 (1) show a state in which a hopper error is detected in the slot machine 100 in the power-on state. In this case, an error code (“HO” corresponding to the hopper error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the hopper error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47). The first sub-control unit 400 that has received the error notification start command outputs an error sound for notifying the hopper error from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.) responds to the hopper error. A process of emitting light in an error light emitting mode and displaying a screen for notifying a hopper error on the effect image display device 157 is executed (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48).

Subsequently, FIGS. 53 (B) and 53 (2) show a state in which the hopper error of FIGS. 53 (B) and (1) is detected and a selector error is further detected. That is, at this point, two types of errors have been detected. When such a plurality of errors are detected, the payout number display 127 displays an error code for one of the errors in order of priority. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the payout number display 127 displays the selector error. Further, an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S704 in FIG. 47), and the first sub-control unit 400 receiving the error notification start command executes the error notification. Here, when error notification is executed by the sound output means or the light emitter, when a plurality of errors are detected, error notification for one of the errors is executed according to the priority. In this embodiment, the selector error is set to have a higher priority than the hopper error, and the error sound from the sound output means (speaker 272,277) and the error emission mode in the light emitter (various lamps 420, etc.). All correspond to selector errors. On the other hand, in the effect image display device 157, in addition to the selector error currently being notified, a process of displaying the screen for notifying the hopper error is executed (steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48).

From the state in which the two types of errors described in FIGS. 53 (B) and 53 (2) are detected, the error notification can be canceled by operating the reset SW in FIGS. 53 (A) (3) and 53 (A) (4). ). FIGS. 53 (B) and 53 (3) show a state in which the error notification of the selector error is canceled by the first reset SW operation as in FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (B). ) (4) shows a state in which the error notification of the hopper error is canceled by the second reset SW operation as in FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (4).

[Operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting change]
Hereinafter, an example of the operation when an error is detected during the setting change will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (A). In this operation example, it is assumed that the setting can be changed (before the operation of the start lever 135 is determined in step S311 of FIG. 43 and the set value is determined).

First, FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (1) show a state in which the power is turned on with the setting key SW ON and the set value can be changed (setting change mode). In this setting change process, a setting change start command is transmitted (step S302 in FIG. 43), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs a setting change sound from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277). Then, a process is executed in which the light emitting body (various lamps 420 and the like) emits light in an open light emitting mode, and the effect image display device 157 displays the management screen (step S807 in FIG. 48). Further, a process of displaying the current set value (step S303 in FIG. 43) is executed using the set value display device 101a. In FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (1), the setting value display device 101a shows that the number 1 indicating the setting 1 is displayed. Further, in this example, a code (“dr” in this example) indicating that the door is open is displayed on the payout number display 127.

FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (2) show the state when the selector error is detected from the states shown in FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (1). In this case, an error code (“CE” corresponding to the selector error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (step S305 in FIG. 43). Here, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the execution of the error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is restricted during the execution of the setting change process or the setting value confirmation (step S807 in FIG. 48). Therefore, in FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (2), all of the light emitting body (various lamps 420 and the like), the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the display means (effect image display device 157) are shown in FIG. 54 (A). It is shown that there is no change from the state of (1). That is, the error notification during the execution of the setting change process is executed only on the payout number display 127. It should be noted that the state is not changed by the signal from the open / close sensor during the execution of the setting change processing (setting change mode) before the start of the timer interrupt processing of the main control unit. FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (3) show that the state of FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (2) is maintained even when the front door 102 is closed from the state of FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (2). ing.

The error notification during the execution of the setting change process can be canceled by operating the reset SW after the cause of the error notification is removed (error non-detection state) (yes determination in step S306 of FIG. 43, Step S310). However, since the reset SW is used for adding and updating the set value, the set value is added when the error notification is canceled. In FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (4), the error notification by the payout number display 127 is canceled by operating the reset SW in the state of FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (2). It is shown that (returned) and that the number 2 indicating the setting 2 added and updated from the setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display device 101a. In a configuration in which the reset SW plays both the role of adding and updating the set value and canceling the error notification, the error can be canceled while changing the set value, which may improve convenience.

Although the operation in the state where the setting can be changed (before the operation of the start lever 135 is determined in step S311 of FIG. 43 and the set value is determined) is described in FIG. 54 (A), the start lever is described in the setting change process. Even after the 135 is operated (after the set value is confirmed), the error notification by the payout number display 127 is executed until the setting change process is completed.

[Operation example of error notification and error cancellation while checking set values]
Hereinafter, an example of the operation when an error is detected during the confirmation of the set value will be described with reference to FIG. 54 (B).

First, FIGS. 54 (B) and 54 (1) show a state when a selector error is detected after the front door 102 is opened, the setting key SW is turned on, and the set value confirmation mode is set. When the front door 102 is in the open state, the door open notification is executed in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the door open detection command (step S502 in FIG. 45, step S807 in FIG. 48). Specifically, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emitting mode, and the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) outputs an opening sound (for example, a voice saying "the door is open"). Then, by turning on the setting key SW, a process of displaying the current setting value using the setting value display device 101a (step S604 in FIG. 46) is executed, and a setting value confirmation start command is further transmitted (step S604 in FIG. 46). Step S605 in FIG. 46). Upon receiving this set value confirmation start command, the first sub-control unit 400 executes a process of displaying the management screen on the effect image display device 157 (step S807 in FIG. 48).

By the above processing, the current set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in an open light emitting mode, and the open sound is output from the sound output means (speaker 272, 277). , The management screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157. If an error is detected in this state, an error code (“CE” corresponding to the selector error in this example) is displayed on the payout number display 127, and an error notification start command corresponding to the selector error is transmitted (in this example). Step S305 in FIG. 43). However, in the present embodiment, the execution of the error notification by the first sub-control unit 400 is restricted during the execution of the setting change process or the setting value confirmation (step S807 in FIG. 48). That is, as shown in FIGS. 54 (B) and 54 (1), a light emitting body (various lamps 420 and the like) emits light in an open light emitting mode, and an open sound is output from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277) to display an effect image. The state in which the management screen is displayed on the device 157 is maintained. That is, the error notification during the confirmation of the set value is executed only by the payout number display device 127.

FIGS. 54 (B) and 54 (2) show a state when the front door 102 is closed from the state of FIGS. 54 (B) and (1). In this case, by closing the front door 102, the set value display device 101a is hidden and the set value confirmation mode ends (yes determination in step S606 of FIG. 46). Further, when the set value confirmation mode ends, error notification can be executed. In FIGS. 54 (B) and 54 (2), an error sound for notifying a selector error is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) is set in an error light emitting mode corresponding to the selector error. It is shown that the light is emitted and the screen for notifying the selector error is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIGS. 54 (B) and 54 (3) show a state when the front door 102 is opened from the state of FIGS. 54 (B) and (2). FIG. 51 (B) has described an example in which the set value confirmation mode is restarted when the front door 102 is opened while the setting key SW is ON. However, since an error is being notified here, the set value is being notified. It is determined that the confirmation period is not valid (No is determined in step S602 of FIG. 46). Therefore, the set value confirmation mode is not started again, and the error notification in FIGS. 54 (B) and 54 (2) is continuously executed. Depending on the error at this time, the game may be allowed to proceed.

FIGS. 54 (B) and 54 (4) show the state when the reset SW is operated after the cause of the error notification is removed from the state of FIGS. 54 (B) and (3) (error non-detection state). There is. By operating this reset switch, the error notification can be canceled (Yes determination in step S706 of FIG. 47, step S708). By canceling this error notification, it is determined that the set value confirmation valid period (yes determination in step S602 of FIG. 46), and the set value is set on the set value display device 101a as shown in FIGS. 54 (B) and (4). It can be set to the displayed state (set value confirmation mode).

For example, in the state of FIGS. 54 (B) and 54 (3), when the door is opened but the detection state of the open / close sensor is forcibly set to the closed detection state and the reset SW is operated, the management screen is displayed. It is not the state (setting confirmation mode) but the state where the customer waiting effect is displayed (game available state).

[Error notification end conditions]
In the above example, after the cause of the error notification is removed (error non-detection state), the operation of canceling the error notification by operating the reset SW has been described, but strictly speaking, the error notification ends when the reset SW is operated. Error notification when the condition (the cause of the error currently being notified has been removed (error not detected) and the error notification execution period exceeds the period for one cycle of the error sound) is satisfied. Can be released. Hereinafter, the error notification end condition will be described with reference to FIG. 55.

FIG. 55 is a diagram showing a timing chart related to error detection.

First, the operation of the timings t1 to t6 will be described.

At the timing t1, the first selector error is detected. For this selector error, it is shown that the display of the selector error, the output of the selector error sound, and the ON state of the security signal start from the timing t1. Note that this security signal is a signal for notifying the outside of the slot machine 100 of the occurrence of an error, and is output from the information output circuit 334.

At the timing t2, the reset SW is operated. At this point, the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound is not output for one cycle, so that the error notification end condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At the timing t3, the first selector error is not detected.

At the timing t4, the reset SW is operated. At this point, the selector error is not detected, but the selector error sound is not output for one cycle, so the error notification end condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At the timing t5, the output of the first cycle of the selector error sound ends and becomes the output of the second cycle.

At the timing t6, the reset SW is operated. At this point, since the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound is output for one cycle, the error notification end condition is satisfied and the error notification is canceled. In addition, all error notifications are completed, and the security signal is turned off.

Next, the operation of the timings t7 to t12 will be described.

At timing t7, the first hopper error is detected. For this hopper error, it is shown that the display of the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound, and the ON state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of the error) start from the timing t7.

At the timing t8, the first hopper error is not detected, and the second selector error is detected. For this selector error, it is shown that the display of the selector error and the output of the selector error sound start from the timing t8. Since the selector error has a higher priority than the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound ends once with the output of the selector error sound. In addition, the state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) continues as it is.

At the timing t9, the second selector error is not detected.

At the timing t10, the reset SW is operated. At this point, since the selector error is not detected and the selector error sound is output for one cycle, the error notification end condition is satisfied and the error notification corresponding to the selector error is canceled. On the other hand, the error notification corresponding to the first hopper error is not canceled, and the output of the hopper error sound that has been once terminated is restarted. In this example, the hopper error sound is output again from the beginning, but the volume may be changed without outputting the error sound again. The state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of an error) continues as it is.

At the timing t11, the reset SW is operated. At this point, although the hopper error is not detected, the hopper error sound is not output for one cycle, so that the error notification end condition is not satisfied and the error notification continues.

At the timing t12, the reset SW is operated. At this point, since the hopper error is not detected and the hopper error sound is output for one cycle, the error notification end condition is satisfied and the error notification is canceled. In addition, all error notifications are completed, and the security signal is turned off.

Next, the operation of the timings t13 to t15 will be described.

At the timing t13, the third selector error is detected. For this selector error, it is shown that the display of the selector error, the output of the selector error sound, and the ON state of the security signal (signal indicating the occurrence of the error) start from the timing t13.

At the timing t14, the third selector error is not detected, and the front door 102 is in the open detection state. In this example, the selector error sound is set to the non-output state according to the period during which the front door 102 is in the open detection state.

At the timing t15, the front door 102 is in the closed detection state. In this example, when the front door 102 is in the closed detection state, the selector error sound is returned to the output state. In this example, the selector error sound is output again from the beginning, but the volume may be changed without outputting the error sound again.

In the above example, the security signal is turned on according to the period during which the error is notified, but for example, when an error is detected, the security signal is turned on for a certain period of time and then turned off for a certain period of time. May be. In this configuration, for example, even if a plurality of errors occur, the security signal for the first error is turned on, then turned off for a certain period of time, and then the security signal for the second error is turned on. Therefore, it is possible to easily grasp the number of error occurrences.

In the present embodiment, when a plurality of errors have occurred, an error display corresponding to each of the plurality of errors is displayed in the display area of the liquid crystal display device 157. Similar to the error code displayed on 127 and the error sound output from the sound output means, only the error display of the priority error may be displayed. In this case, when the second selector error is detected at the timing t8 in FIG. 55, the selector error is displayed for this selector error, the output of the selector error sound starts from the timing t8, and the selector error is a hopper error. Since the priority is higher than, the display of the hopper error and the output of the hopper error sound are temporarily terminated. Then, when the selector error is cleared, the display of the hopper error, the output of the hopper error sound, and the like are started as in the timing t10.

[Modification example of error notification and error cancellation]
In the above [Error notification and error cancellation operation example (1)] and [Error notification and error cancellation operation example (2)], a plurality of error notifications are executed, and all the causes of the error notifications are eliminated. The operation in which the reset SW is operated in this state and the error notification of one of them is canceled according to the priority order has been described. Here, if only a part of the cause of the error notification has been removed, the error notification may be canceled for the error for which the cause has been removed. Further, one of the error notifications may be targeted according to the priority order, and the error notification may be canceled when the cause of the error notification is eliminated. Hereinafter, an operation example when this configuration is adopted will be described with reference to FIG. 56.

First, the states of FIGS. 56 (A) (1) and 56 (A) (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 53 (A) (1) and 53 (A) (2), respectively.

From the state in which the two types of errors shown in FIGS. 56 (A) and 56 (2) are detected, the front door 102 is opened to eliminate only the hopper error (error not detected state), and the reset switch is set to cancel the error notification. It is assumed that the button is pressed once. FIGS. 56 (A) and 56 (3) show the state at this time. Here, of the selector error and the hopper error, the selector error having a higher priority is the target of cancellation, but since the cause of this selector error has not been resolved, the error notification is not canceled. In FIGS. 56 (A) and 56 (3), it is shown that the reset SW is pressed once, but the error notification is not canceled. If the error notification for the hopper error whose cause of the error has been resolved by the operation of the reset SW is canceled, the error notification will be canceled without the administrator recognizing the hopper error. Since such a situation does not occur in the example of FIG. 56A, the administrator can cancel the error notification after recognizing the error.

Further, it is assumed that the selector error is resolved (error non-detection state) from the state in which the two types of errors shown in FIGS. 56 (A) and 56 (3) are detected, and the reset SW is pressed once to cancel the error notification. .. FIGS. 56 (A) and 56 (4) show the state at this time. Here, among the selector error and the hopper error, the selector error having a higher priority is the target of cancellation, and since the cause of this selector error has been eliminated, the error notification for the selector error is canceled. In FIGS. 56A and 56A, it is shown that as a result of pressing the reset SW once, the error notification of the selector error is canceled and the error notification of the remaining hopper error is executed.

Next, the states of FIGS. 56 (B) (1) and 56 (B) (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 53 (B) (1) and 53 (B) (2), respectively. The states of FIGS. 56 (B) and 56 (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 56 (A) and 56 (2), and the following states of FIGS. 56 (B) (3) and 56 (B) (4) are described. It is the same as FIGS. 56 (A) (3) and 56 (A) (4), respectively. That is, in the example of FIG. 56 (B), the order of error notification until the two types of errors are detected is different from that of FIG. 56 (A). However, this difference in the order of error notification has no effect on error cancellation.

[Modification example when the front door 102 is closed while checking the set value]
The slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is provided with a front door 102, and in the above [operation example when the front door 102 is closed during setting value confirmation execution], the slot machine is depending on the open / closed state of the front door 102. An example in which the state of 100 changes has been described.

Here, in the case of a configuration in which a plurality of doors are provided, for example, the front door 102 is composed of two doors, an upper door and a lower door, how to apply the above operation. It becomes a problem. Hereinafter, an operation example when this configuration is adopted will be described with reference to FIG. 57.

In FIG. 57, the open / close sensor for the upper door is referred to as “open / close detection SW1”, and the open / close sensor for the lower door is referred to as “open / close detection SW2”. Further, a door key for locking these doors together is provided, and the state of the door key is detected by the "door key SW". The door key SW has a "closed detection state" that detects that all doors are locked, and an "opening detection state" that detects that all doors are unlocked. The state in which the door key is not inserted is defined as the "non-detection state".

First, in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (1), in the slot machine 100 in the power-on state, the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (waiting for the start of the game by the player), and the open / close detection SW1 and the open / close detection are detected. All SW2s are in the closed detection state, the light emitting body (various lamps 420, etc.) emits light in the customer waiting light emitting mode, the customer waiting BGM is output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 displays the effect image. The state in which the customer waiting effect is displayed is shown.

Next, in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (2), both the upper door and the lower door are opened from the state shown in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (A) by using the door key (open / close detection SW1 and open / close detection SW2). , And the door key SW are both in the open detection state), and it is assumed that the setting key SW is in the ON state. In this case, a door open detection command is transmitted (step S502 in FIG. 45), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command outputs an open sound from the sound output means (speakers 272 and 277), and the light emitter (light emitter (step S502)). A process of emitting light from various lamps (420, etc.) in an open light emission mode is executed (step S807 in FIG. 48). Further, since the setting key SW is in the ON state, the current set value can be confirmed (set value confirmation mode) (yes determination in step S603 of FIG. 46). In this state, the process of displaying the current set value (step S604 in FIG. 46) is executed using the set value display device 101a. In FIGS. 57A and 57A, the setting value display device 101a shows that the number 1 indicating the setting 1 is displayed. Further, a set value confirmation start command is transmitted (step S605 in FIG. 46), and the first sub-control unit 400 that receives this command executes a process of displaying the management screen on the staging image display device 157. (Steps S807 to S817 in FIG. 48). The output from the sound output means (speakers 272, 277) maintains the open sound, and the light emitting mode of the light emitting body (various lamps 420 and the like) is maintained in the open light emitting mode.

In FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (3), from the state shown in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (2), both the upper door and the lower door are closed, and the open / close detection SW1, the open / close detection SW2, and the door key SW are all closed. The state when the detection state is reached is shown. While the set value confirmation process is being executed (set value confirmation mode), the set value confirmation mode is the same as when the set key is turned off when the open / close detection SW1, the open / close detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the closed detection state. Is configured to end (yes determination in step S606 of FIG. 46). FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (3) show that the display on the set value display device 101a is hidden because the set value confirmation mode is terminated while the setting key is ON. ..

When the upper door and the lower door are opened again from the state of FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (3), the set value confirmation mode is started again because the setting key is already in the ON state (FIG. FIG. Yes determination in step S603 of 46). FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (4) show that the state is the same as that shown in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (2).

The above modification is the same as when the front door 102 described with reference to FIG. 51 (B) is in the open state because the open / close detection SW1, the open / close detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the open detection state. It is configured to work. Further, since the open / close detection SW1, the open / close detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the closed detection state, the operation is the same as when the front door 102 described with reference to FIG. 51 (B) is in the closed state. It is configured in. Here, the operation when the open / close detection SW1, the open / close detection SW2, and the door key SW do not all match will be further described with reference to FIG. 57 (B).

First, the states of FIGS. 57 (B) (1) and 57 (B) (2) are the same as those of FIGS. 57 (A) (1) and 57 (A) (2), respectively. Further, in FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (3), only the upper door is closed (open / close detection SW1 is closed detection state) from the state shown in FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (2), and the door key is further removed (door key SW). Is not detected) is shown. Further, FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (4) show a state when the lower door is in the closed state (open / close detection SW2 is in the closed detection state) from the state shown in FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (3). .. In FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (5), when the door key is inserted from the state shown in FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (4) to the position where all the doors are locked (the door key SW is in the closed detection state). (Same state as in FIGS. 57 (A) and 57 (3)) is shown.

In FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (3), since the open / close detection SW1, the open / close detection SW2, and the door key SW are all in the open detection state, and these states are inconsistent, the set value is not confirmed. It is shown that the player is in a state in which the game is not possible (a state in which the game cannot be played). In this state, the set value displayed on the set value display device 101a is hidden, and the message "The door is open" is displayed on the screen of the effect image display device 157. In this state, the game cannot be started.

Further, in FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (4), although the open / close detection SW1 and the open / close detection SW2 are in the closed detection state, the door key SW is in the non-detection state (open / close detection SW1, open / close detection SW2, door key). SW does not match), and it is shown that the game is impossible even in this case. After that, when the door key is inserted and all the doors are locked (the door key SW is in the closed detection state), the game becomes playable as shown in FIGS. 57 (B) and 57 (5) (FIG. 57 (A) (5). Same state as 3)).

When a plurality of doors are provided as in the example of FIG. 57 (A), the set value is confirmed in the same manner as when the front door 102 is in the open state when all of the plurality of doors are in the open state. The transition to the state may be performed, and when all of the plurality of doors are in the closed state, the set value confirmation state may be terminated in the same manner as when the front door 102 is in the closed state. Further, in the example of FIG. 57A, not only the state of the plurality of doors but also the state of the door key is determined, but the state of the door key may not be determined. Further, FIG. 57B has described an example in which a game becomes impossible if the states of a plurality of doors and door keys do not match between the transition to the set value confirmation state and the end of the setting value confirmation state. , The configuration may not provide such a state. Further, unlike the example of FIG. 57, for example, the transition to the set value confirmation state may be performed based on the state of one of the plurality of doors, or the set value confirmation state may be performed based on the state of the door key. You may want to make the transition to.

[About the check operation of the staging means]
In this embodiment, various effect means such as an effect image display device 157, a shutter 163, a speaker 272, 277, and various lamps 420 are provided. Hereinafter, an example of the operation for confirming the effect means will be described with reference to the examples of FIGS. 58 to 60. In the present embodiment, when the front door 102 (open / close sensor) is closed during the setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode), the setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode) is terminated. It is assumed that the front door 102 (open / close sensor) is closed during the setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode), but the setting value confirmation (setting confirmation mode) is continued without ending.

[Check operation of staging means (1)]
The example of FIG. 58 is an example of the confirmation operation of the shutter 163. In this example, it is assumed that the shutter 163 is provided with the effect lamp 163L.

58 (a) to 58 (f) are diagrams showing an example of the flow of operation when the power is turned on. In this example, it is assumed that the shutter 163 in the initial position is closed when the power is turned on, and then the confirmation operation of returning to the initial position is executed.

FIG. 58A shows a state before the power is turned on. In this state, nothing is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and it is shown that nothing is output from the speakers 272 and 277. Further, the shutters 163 are located on the left and right sides of the staging image display device 157, but this position is a state in which the shutter 163 is completely open, and this position is the initial position.

FIG. 58 (b) shows a state when the power is turned on from the state of FIG. 58 (a). In this state, the message "starting up" is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and it is indicated that the sound "power is turned on" is output from the speakers 272 and 277. The shutter 163 remains in the initial position.

In FIG. 58 (c), the demonstration effect is started by the effect image display device 157 from the state of FIG. 58 (b), and the sound "power is turned on" from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. It is shown that. Further, the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 is started, and it is shown that the shutter 163 at the initial position is moving in the closing direction. Further, at this time, the effect lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 is in the lighting mode at the time of the demonstration effect.

FIG. 58 (d) shows that the shutter 163 has been further moved from the state of FIG. 58 (c) to be in a completely closed state.

FIG. 58 (e) shows that the shutter 163 is moving toward the initial position from the state of FIG. 58 (d).

FIG. 58 (f) shows that the shutter 163 has returned to the initial position from the state of FIG. 58 (e).

As shown in FIGS. 58 (a) to 58 (f), it is possible to confirm whether or not the shutter 163 operates normally by the confirmation operation when the power is turned on.

Further, during the confirmation operation, the lighting mode of the staging lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 changes as the open / closed state of the front door 102 changes. By this change, the state of the front door 102 can also be confirmed. It should be noted that, for this change in the lighting mode, turning off may be one of the lighting equalities. FIGS. 58 (g) and 58 (h) show a state when the open / closed state of the front door 102 is changed (for example, from a closed state to an open state) from the state shown in FIG. 58 (b). FIGS. 58 (g) and 58 (h) show that the lighting mode of the staging lamp 163L has changed due to the change in the open / closed state of the front door 102 in the states of FIGS. 58 (c) and 58 (d), respectively. Has been done. In this example, since the front door 102 is in the open state, it is shown that the voice "the door is open" is output from the speakers 272 and 277. As shown in the flow from FIGS. 58 (h) to 58 (e), the lighting mode of the staging preparation lamp 163L changed due to the change in the open / closed state of the front door 102 changes in the open / closed state of the front door 102. It returns to the original state by returning to the previous state. Further, in this example, since the front door 102 is in the closed state, the output from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped.

[Check operation of staging means (2)]
The example of FIG. 59 is an example of the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277. In this example, it is assumed that the confirmation operation is executed by the operation from the management screen. The management screen here is not limited to the one displayed during the above-mentioned setting change or setting value confirmation, and may be displayed by, for example, a specific operation by the administrator.

FIG. 59A shows a state in which the management screen is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Here, "Operation check" is selected from the menus displayed on this management screen, the screen is switched to the screen shown in FIG. 59 (b), and "Speaker check" is selected from the menus displayed on the switched screens. Suppose you select.

The confirmation operation started by selecting the above "speaker check" outputs the confirmation voice in the order of the right speaker, the left speaker, and the lower speaker, and selects "speaker check end". Up to, the above audio output is repeated in order. The number of repetitions may be preset, or the execution time of the confirmation operation may be preset.

FIGS. 59 (c) to 59 (e) show that the output is executed in the order of the right speaker, the left speaker, and the lower speaker as the first output in the confirmation operation. Then, FIG. 59 (f) shows how the output from the right speaker is being executed in the second output in the confirmation operation.

If "Speaker check" is selected again during the execution of the above confirmation operation, the execution confirmation operation ends and a new confirmation operation is executed.

In FIGS. 59 (g) to 59 (i), “speaker check” is selected from the menu displayed on the screen of FIG. 59 (b), and the right speaker and the left speaker are used as the first output in the confirmation operation. It is shown that the output up to is being executed. Here, in FIG. 59 (j), by selecting "speaker check" again in the state of FIG. 59 (i), the confirmation operation being executed ends, and the second output in the new confirmation operation is completed. It is shown that the output from the right speaker in is being executed. After that, FIG. 59 (k) shows that the execution of the confirmation operation is completed by selecting "End speaker check" in the state of FIG. 59 (j).

Here, in the above example, the configuration in which the confirmation operation is terminated by selecting "Speaker check end" has been described. However, for example, the confirmation operation is terminated when the front door 102 is in the open state. You may do it. In FIG. 59 (l), the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is completed by opening the front door 102 from the state of FIG. 59 (i), and the voice "door is open" is output. It is shown that it has been done. In this case, the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 may be restarted when the front door 102 is closed, or may not be restarted. When the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is restarted, the confirmation operation may be restarted from the state when the front door 102 is opened, or when the front door 102 is opened. A new confirmation operation may be started regardless of the state of.

[Check operation of staging means (3)]
The example of FIG. 60 is an example of the confirmation operation of the shutter 163. In this example, it is assumed that the shutter 163 is provided with the effect lamp 163L. In this example, it is assumed that the confirmation operation is executed by the operation from the management screen (see FIG. 59 (b)). The management screen here is not limited to the one displayed during the above-mentioned setting change or setting value confirmation, and may be displayed by, for example, a specific operation by the administrator.

FIG. 60A shows a menu displayed by selecting “operation check” from the management screen. Here, it is assumed that "movable body check" is selected from this menu.

FIGS. 60 (b) to 60 (f) show that the confirmation operation of closing the shutter 163 from the initial position where the shutter 163 is completely open and then returning the shutter 163 to the initial position is executed. ing.

During the execution of this confirmation operation, while the front door 102 is in the open state, the lighting mode of the staging lamp 163L provided on the shutter 163 changes. FIG. 60 (c) shows that the lighting mode of the staging lamp 163L is changed by opening the front door 102. Further, it is shown that the voice "the door is open" is output from the speakers 272 and 277 while the front door 102 is in the open state. Further, FIG. 60 (d) shows that the lighting mode of the staging lamp 163L is restored by closing the front door 102, and the output from the speakers 272 and 277 is stopped. ..

Further, if "movable body check" is selected again during the execution of this confirmation operation, the confirmation operation is not newly started and nothing is executed for this operation. In FIG. 60 (d), "movable body check" is selected again while the confirmation operation is being executed, but in FIG. 60 (e), the confirmation operation being executed continues as it is regardless of this operation. It is shown to be.

FIG. 60 (g) shows a menu displayed by selecting “operation check” from the management screen. Here, it is assumed that "movable body check" is selected from this menu.

FIGS. 60 (h) to 60 (l) show that the confirmation operation of closing the shutter 163 from the initial position where the shutter 163 is completely open and then returning the shutter 163 to the initial position is executed. ing.

If "speaker check" is selected during the execution of this confirmation operation, the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 described with reference to FIG. 59 is started and executed in parallel with the confirmation operation of the shutter 163. FIG. 60 (k) shows that the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 and the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 are executed in parallel. Further, FIG. 60 (l) shows that the confirmation operation of the speakers 272 and 277 is continuously executed when the confirmation operation of the shutter 163 is completed.

<< Correspondence between the configuration of the invention and the embodiment >>
Hereinafter, the configuration of the invention based on the above embodiment will be described with reference to the corresponding configuration.

In the above explanation (in particular, [operation example when setting value confirmation is executed] [operation example when the front door 102 is closed during setting value confirmation execution]),
A main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that controls a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A door body (for example, front door 102) that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
An opening / closing determining means (for example, a main control unit 300) for determining an opening / closing state of the door body,
A predetermined operating means (for example, a setting key SW) having a first operation state (for example, a state in which the setting key SW is OFF) and a second operation state (for example, a state in which the setting key SW is ON) as an operation state. It is a game table equipped with,
The main control means
A game-enabled state in which the game can proceed and a setting confirmation state in which the currently set set value can be confirmed (for example, the set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a in step S604 of FIG. 46). Any of multiple states including at least (state) can be set.
When the door body is determined to be in the open state by the open / close determination means, and the predetermined operating means is operated from the first operating state to the second operating state, the setting confirmation state is displayed. It is possible to start (eg, change from the state of FIGS. 50 (B) (2) to the state of FIGS. 50 (B) (3)).
When the door body is determined to be in the closed state by the open / close determination means in the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is displayed even if the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state. It is a means capable of ending and starting the game-enabled state (for example, a change from the state of FIGS. 51 (B) (2) to the state of FIGS. 51 (B) (3)).
I explained about the game table, which is characterized by this.

In the above game table, it is possible to make the game playable by simply closing the door from the setting confirmation state. Further, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation state from being seen by the player, and it is possible to improve security.

In addition, the game table described above is
The main control means
When the door body is determined to be in the open state by the open / close determination means in the state in which the game is possible and the predetermined operating means is operated in the second operating state, the game is played. It is a means capable of ending the possible state and starting the setting confirmation state (for example, a change from the state of FIGS. 51 (B) (3) to the state of FIGS. 51 (B) (4)).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game table, for example, when the administrator plays a game for a trial, the set value can be confirmed immediately by opening the door before and after this. Also, even if the administrator forgets to exit the setting confirmation status, the setting confirmation status is immediately entered just by opening the door, so it is possible to immediately notice that the setting confirmation status was not terminated by the normal procedure. ..

In addition, the game table described above is
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels are further provided.
The main control means
When the reel is rotating in the gameable state and the predetermined operating means is operated in the second operating state, the door body is opened by the open / close determination means. It is a means that does not start the setting confirmation state even if it is determined to exist (for example, [operation example (1) in the state where the setting key SW is ON], from the state of FIGS. 52 (A) (1) to FIG. 52. (A) Change to the state of (2)),
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game table, if the door is opened during the game, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve security by not controlling the setting confirmation state. ..

In addition, the game table described above is
An error detecting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of detecting a predetermined error, and
Further provided with an error notification means (for example, a payout number display 127) capable of executing a predetermined error notification.
The error notification means is
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detecting means in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification can be executed in the setting confirmation state (for example, FIGS. 54 (B) (1)).
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detecting means, the setting confirmation state is not newly started (for example, [operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIG. 46. No determination in step S602, change from the state of FIGS. 54 (B) (2) to the state of FIGS. 54 (B) (3)).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game console, if the door is opened during error notification, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed, so it is possible to improve security by not controlling to the setting confirmation state. can.

In addition, the above explanation (in particular, [operation example when setting change is executed] [operation example when setting value confirmation is executed] [operation example when the front door 102 is closed during setting change execution] [setting] Operation example when the front door 102 is closed during value confirmation])
A main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that controls a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
A door body (for example, front door 102) that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
An opening / closing determining means (for example, a main control unit 300) for determining an opening / closing state of the door body,
A predetermined operating means (for example, a setting key SW) having a first operation state (for example, a state in which the setting key SW is OFF) and a second operation state (for example, a state in which the setting key SW is ON) as an operation state. It is a game table equipped with,
The main control means
A game-enabled state in which the game can proceed, and a setting confirmation state in which the currently set set value can be confirmed (for example, a state in which the set value is displayed on the set value display device 101a in step S604 of FIG. 46). , And a plurality of setting change states (for example, a state in which the setting value can be changed by step S306 and step S307 of FIG. 43) in which any setting value can be set from the plurality of setting values. Any of the states can be set,
When the door body is determined to be in the open state by the open / close determination means, and the predetermined operating means is operated from the first operating state to the second operating state, the setting confirmation state is displayed. It is possible to start (eg, change from the state of FIGS. 50 (B) (2) to the state of FIGS. 50 (B) (3)).
It is possible to start the setting change state based on the fact that the power is turned on while the predetermined operating means is being operated in the second operating state (for example, FIGS. 50A (1) (1). ), Changes in FIGS. 50 (A) and 50 (2)),
When the door body is determined to be in the closed state by the open / close determination means in the setting confirmation state, the setting confirmation state is displayed even if the predetermined operation means is operated to the second operation state. It is possible to end and start the game-enabled state (for example, a change from the state of FIGS. 51 (B) (2) to the state of FIGS. 51 (B) (3)).
In the setting change state, even if the door body is determined to be in the closed state by the open / close determination means, the gameable state is not started (for example, from the state of FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (2)). Changes to the states shown in FIGS. 51 (A) and 51 (3)),
I explained about the game table, which is characterized by this.

In the above game table, it is possible to make the game playable by simply closing the door from the setting confirmation state. Further, even if the administrator forgets to end the setting confirmation state, it is possible to prevent the setting confirmation state from being seen by the player, and it is possible to improve security.

On the other hand, regarding the setting change state, if the game can be started immediately by closing the door when it is not completed by the normal procedure, it is inconvenient that the setting value expected by the administrator is not set. May occur. Therefore, unlike the setting confirmation state, it is possible to improve security and convenience by not starting the game when the door is closed.

In addition, the game table described above is
The main control means
When the door body is determined to be in the open state by the open / close determination means in the state in which the game is possible and the predetermined operating means is operated in the second operating state, the game is played. It is a means capable of ending the possible state and starting the setting confirmation state (for example, a change from the state of FIGS. 51 (B) (3) to the state of FIGS. 51 (B) (4)).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game table, for example, when the administrator plays a game for a trial, the set value can be confirmed immediately by opening the door before and after this. Also, even if the administrator forgets to exit the setting confirmation status, the setting confirmation status is immediately entered just by opening the door, so it is possible to immediately notice that the setting confirmation status was not terminated by the normal procedure. ..

In addition, the game table described above is
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) to which a plurality of types of symbols are applied and driven to rotate,
A plurality of stop buttons (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and for individually stopping the rotation of the reels are further provided.
The main control means
When the reel is rotating in the gameable state and the predetermined operating means is operated in the second operating state, the door body is opened by the open / close determination means. It is a means that does not start the setting confirmation state even if it is determined to exist (for example, [operation example (1) in the state where the setting key SW is ON], from the state of FIGS. 52 (A) (1) to FIG. 52. (A) Change to the state of (2)),
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game table, if the door is opened during the game, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed. Therefore, it is possible to improve security by not controlling the setting confirmation state. ..

In addition, the game table described above is
An error detecting means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of detecting a predetermined error, and
Further provided with an error notification means (for example, a payout number display 127) capable of executing a predetermined error notification.
The error notification means is
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detecting means in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification can be executed in the setting confirmation state (for example, FIGS. 54 (B) (1)).
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detecting means, the setting confirmation state is not newly started (for example, [operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIG. 46. No determination in step S602, change from the state of FIGS. 54 (B) (2) to the state of FIGS. 54 (B) (3)).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game console, if the door is opened during error notification, there is a possibility that fraudulent activity has been performed, so it is possible to improve security by not controlling to the setting confirmation state. can.

Further, in the above description (in particular, [checking operation of staging means (1)] [checking action of staging means (2)] [checking action of staging means (3)]).
A main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that controls a game,
An effect means including a first effect means (for example, speakers 272 and 277) and a second effect means (for example, shutter 163) different from the first effect means.
With a predetermined operation means (for example, a cross button),
Confirmation operation means (for example, first sub-control unit 400) for executing predetermined confirmation operations (for example, FIGS. 58 (b) to (f) and FIGS. 59 (c) to (e)) for the staging means. ), And a game table equipped with
The main control means
It is a means that can set a predetermined state (for example, the state in which the management screen is displayed).
The confirmation operation means is
When the first operation (for example, selection of the "speaker check" in FIG. 59 (b)) is performed on the predetermined operating means in the predetermined state, the confirmation operation on the first staging means can be executed. It is possible and
When the second operation (for example, selection of the "movable body check" in FIG. 60A) is performed on the predetermined operating means in the predetermined state, the confirmation operation on the second effecting means is executed. Is possible,
When the first operation is performed while the first effect means is executing the confirmation operation, the execution of the confirmation operation is terminated and a new confirmation operation for the first effect means is performed. While starting (eg, the change from the state of FIG. 59 (i) to the state of FIG. 59 (j)).
Even if the second operation is performed while the second effect means is executing the confirmation operation, the confirmation operation during the execution is not terminated (for example, FIGS. 60 (d) to 60 (for example). e) Change to state) Means,
I explained about the game table, which is characterized by this.

The effect means of the game console are not limited to the speakers 272 and 277 of the present embodiment, various lamps 420, the effect image display device 157, and the shutter 163, but also include vibration means, for example, and various types peculiar to each effect means. Can perform various actions. In the above-mentioned game console, when performing such a confirmation operation of the effect means, the first effect means and the second effect means are divided according to their characteristics to improve the convenience of confirming the operation. May be possible. The first and second staging means are not limited to the configuration of the staging means of the present embodiment.

In addition, the game table described above is
The first effect means includes a plurality of effect means (for example, a left speaker, a right speaker, and a lower speaker).
The confirmation operation for the first effect means is an operation for sequentially executing a predetermined operation for each of the plurality of effect means included in the first effect means (for example, FIG. 59 (c)). ~ (E) operation),
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game table, even if the confirmation operation of a plurality of production means is performed, the operation can be immediately confirmed again from the first production means by performing the first operation, which is convenient when confirming the operation. It is possible to improve the sex. As the first staging means, various staging means can be adopted without being limited to the configuration of the staging means of the present embodiment.

In addition, the game table described above is
The confirmation operation means is
At the time of turning on the power, even if the second operation for the operating means is not performed, the confirmation operation for the second staging means may be executed (for example, FIGS. 58A to 58A). (F) operation),
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game table, a new confirmation operation can be performed even during the confirmation operation for the first effect means, but a new confirmation operation can be performed for the second effect means during the confirmation operation. Can not. However, since the opportunity to execute the confirmation operation for the second staging means is provided at the time of turning on the power, the opportunity for confirming the operation for the second staging means can be obtained. In addition, the confirmation operation when the power is turned on makes it possible to detect a defect as soon as possible. It should be noted that the confirmation operation for the second staging means at the time of turning on the power is not limited to the configuration that is always executed, and may be executed under some conditions.

In addition, the game table described above is
The confirmation operation means is
When the second operation is performed while the first effect means is executing the confirmation operation, the confirmation operation for the first effect means is continued and the confirmation operation for the second effect means is continued. It is possible to execute the confirmation operation (for example, the operation shown in FIG. 60 (k)).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above-mentioned game console, the operation confirmation time can be shortened by executing the confirmation operation of the first effect means and the confirmation operation of the second effect means in parallel.

In addition, the game table described above is
Further provided with a setting means (for example, a main control unit 300) capable of setting any of a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player.
The predetermined state is
It is a setting change state in which any one of the plurality of setting values can be set.
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In addition, the game table described above is
Further provided with a setting means capable of setting any setting value from a plurality of setting values having different advantages for the player.
The predetermined state is
It is a setting confirmation state in which it is possible to confirm the currently set value.
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In addition, the game table described above is
The first directing means is a means for outputting sound, and is
The second directing means is a movable body.
It may be a game table characterized by that.

Further, in the above description (in particular, [operation example of error notification and error cancellation (1)] [operation example of error notification and error cancellation (2)] [error notification end condition]),
A first error detecting means (eg, a selector sensor) capable of detecting a first error (eg, a selector error), and
An error notification means (for example, payout number display 127, speaker 272, 277) capable of executing error notification, and
A game console provided with a predetermined operating means (for example, a reset SW) capable of canceling the error notification.
The error notification means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detecting means, it is possible to execute the first error notification notifying that the first error has been detected (for example, FIG. 53 (A)). (1)),
In the first period after the first error notification is executed (for example, the period until "selector error" is output once), the first error notification is sent even if the cancellation operation is performed. Continued (for example, timings t2 and t4 in FIG. 55), and when the release operation is performed after the first period has elapsed from the execution of the first error notification, the first error notification is terminated. Means (for example, the error notification end condition of step S309 and step S318 of FIG. 43, and the error notification end condition of step S707 of FIG. 47, timing t6 of FIG. 55).
I explained about the game table, which is characterized by this.

In the above game console, the error is not cleared during the first period after the error notification is executed, so the administrator (or the player) can be more surely aware that the error has occurred, and the security is improved. Can be planned. In the above embodiment, the configuration in which this first period is set to the period for one cycle of the error sound has been described, but if the period during which the error notification is executed is guaranteed to some extent, the first period The period is not limited. Further, the above configuration can be applied not only to the error in the above embodiment but also to various types of errors.

In addition, the game table described above is
A security signal output means (for example, an information output circuit 443) that outputs a security signal to the outside of the game console based on the occurrence of an error is further provided.
The security signal output means is
It is a means for continuing the output of the security signal during the first period after the first error notification is executed (for example, FIG. 55).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above-mentioned game console, by guaranteeing the output time of the security signal, the security signal can be normally output to the outside, and the security can be improved.

In addition, the game table described above is
The first error notification is
It is a notification including a voice in which a predetermined announcement sound (for example, a voice of "selector error") is repeatedly output.
The first period is
It is a period longer than the period required for one output of the predetermined announcement sound.
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game console, the announcement sound is output at least once before the error is cleared, so that the administrator (or the player) can be more surely aware that the error has occurred. It is possible to improve security.

In addition, the game table described above is
A door body (for example, front door 102) that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
Further provided with an opening / closing detecting means (for example, an opening / closing sensor) capable of detecting the open / closed state of the door body.
The predetermined operating means is
It is a means provided at a position where it can be operated only when the door body is in the open state.
The first error notification is
It is a notification including the display of a predetermined error image (for example, the image of the effect image display device 157 of FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (1)).
The error notification means is
When the open state is detected by the open / close detecting means in executing the first error notification, the audio output of the first error notification is stopped and the predetermined error image is displayed (. For example, the timings t14 to t15) in FIG. 55,
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game console, when the administrator opens the door during error notification to cancel the error, the error sound output is stopped with the error image left at a minimum, resulting in an error in the error clearing work. It is possible to eliminate the annoyance of sound.

In addition, the game table described above is
Further provided with a second error detecting means (eg, hopper sensor) capable of detecting a second error (eg, hopper error).
The error notification means is
When the second error is detected by the second error detecting means, it is possible to execute a second error notification notifying that the second error has been detected (for example, FIG. 53 (B)). (1)),
There is a case where the first error notification is terminated and the second error notification is started (hereinafter referred to as "first case") (for example, timing t10 in FIG. 55).
In the second error notification in the first case, in the second period from the execution of the second error notification (for example, the period until "Hopper error" is output once), the above. Even if the release operation is performed, the second error notification is continued (for example, timings t10 to t12 in FIG. 55).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game console, since the error notification is surely executed for each of a plurality of errors, it is possible to make the administrator (or the player) more surely understand that each error has occurred. It is possible to improve security. In the above embodiment, the configuration in which this second period is set to the period for one cycle of the error sound has been described, but if the period during which the error notification is executed is guaranteed to some extent, this second period The period is not limited.

Further, in the above description (in particular, [operation example of error notification and error cancellation (1)] [operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting change]),
A main control means (for example, a main control unit 300) that controls a game based on any one of a plurality of set values.
An error detecting means (for example, a selector sensor) capable of detecting a predetermined error (for example, a selector error) and
A game table provided with error notification means (for example, payout number display 127, speaker 272, 277) capable of executing error notification.
The main control means
A game-enabled state in which the game can proceed, and a setting change state in which any of a plurality of set values can be set (for example, the set value can be changed by steps S306 and S307 in FIG. 43). Any of multiple states including at least (possible state) can be set.
The error notification means is
When the predetermined error is detected by the error detecting means, it is possible to execute a predetermined error notification notifying that the predetermined error has been detected (for example, FIGS. 53 (A) and 54 (1), FIG. 54). (A) (2)),
In the game-enabled state, the predetermined error notification is executed in the first aspect (for example, FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (1)).
In the setting change state, it is a means for executing the predetermined error notification in a second aspect different from the first aspect (for example, FIGS. 54 (A) and 54 (2)).
I explained about the game table, which is characterized by this.

The game console has a configuration in which the mode of error notification differs between a game-enabled state in which the player plays a game and a setting change state in which the administrator changes the set value. In this way, by changing the mode of error notification according to the situation, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game console that the administrator does not feel bothered while maintaining security. As the error notification means, various notification means can be adopted without being limited to the configuration in the present embodiment.

In addition, the game table described above is
The first aspect is a more prominent aspect than the second aspect, a noisier aspect than the second aspect, or a more recognizable aspect than the second aspect (for example, FIG. 54 (for example). A) In (2), the error notification is executed only by the payout number display 127, but in FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (1), the error notification is executed by at least the payout number display 127 and the speaker 272, 277).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game table, the error notification is easier to understand in the game-enabled state in which the player plays the game than in the setting change state in which the administrator changes the set value. With this configuration, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game console that the administrator does not feel bothered at the stage of error processing while ensuring that the error notification is transmitted more reliably.

In addition, the game table described above is
The plurality of states include a setting confirmation state in which the currently set setting value can be confirmed (for example, a state in which the setting value is displayed on the setting value display device 101a in step S604 of FIG. 46). ,
The error notification means is
In the setting confirmation state, it is a means for executing the predetermined error notification in the second aspect (for example, [operation example of error notification and error cancellation during setting value confirmation], FIGS. 54 (B) (1). ),
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game table, the setting confirmation state in which the administrator confirms the set value is configured to have the same error notification mode as the setting change state. In this way, by changing the mode of error notification according to the situation, it is possible to provide a highly convenient game console that the administrator does not feel bothered while maintaining security.

In addition, the game table described above is
A door body (for example, front door 102) that is provided on the front of the game table and can be opened and closed,
An opening / closing determining means (for example, a main control unit 300) for determining an opening / closing state of the door body,
A predetermined operating means (for example, a setting key SW) having a first operation state (for example, a state in which the setting key SW is OFF) and a second operation state (for example, a state in which the setting key SW is ON) as an operation state. , Further prepared,
The main control means
When the door body is determined to be in the open state by the open / close determination means, and the predetermined operating means is operated from the first operating state to the second operating state, the setting confirmation state is displayed. It is a means that can be initiated (eg, a change from the state of FIGS. 50 (B) (2) to the state of FIGS. 50 (B) (3)).
The error notification means is
When it is determined by the open / close determination means that the door body is in the closed state while the predetermined error notification is being executed in the second aspect in the setting confirmation state, the predetermined error notification is performed. The notification mode is changed from the second aspect to the first aspect (for example, the change from the state of FIGS. 54 (B) (1) to the state of FIGS. 54 (B) (2)).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game table, the mode of error notification changes at the moment when the door is closed, so that the administrator can easily notice that he / she has forgotten to cancel the error.

Further, in the above description (in particular, [operation example of error notification and error cancellation (1)] [operation example of error notification and error cancellation (2)]),
Error detection means that can detect errors (for example, selector sensor, hopper sensor), and
A first notification means (for example, an effect image display device 157) capable of executing error notification, and
A game console provided with a predetermined operating means (for example, a reset SW) capable of canceling the error notification.
The error detecting means is
A first error detecting means (eg, a selector sensor) capable of detecting a first error (eg, a selector error) and a second error detecting means (eg, a hopper error) capable of detecting a second error (eg, a hopper error). , Hopper sensor), including,
The first notification means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detecting means, the first error notification (for example, FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (1)) for notifying that the first error has been detected is performed. Feasible and
When the second error is detected by the second error detecting means, a second error notification (for example, FIGS. 53 (B) (1)) for notifying that the second error has been detected is provided. Feasible and
When the second error is detected by the second error detecting means while the first error is detected by the first error detecting means (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed (for example, FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (2)).
In the first case, the cause of the first error is eliminated and the cause of the second error is caused while the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed. If the release operation is performed once after the removal of the above, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued (for example, FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (3)).
I explained about the game table, which is characterized by this.

In the above game console, even if two types of error factors have been removed, it is possible to improve security by prompting the administrator to confirm each error location by gradually canceling the error. ..

In addition, the game table described above is
A second notification means capable of executing error notification (for example, payout number display 127), and the like are included.
The second notification means is a means for executing the first error notification in the first case but not executing the second error notification (for example, FIGS. 53 (A) and 53 (2)). ,
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above-mentioned game console, it may be possible to improve security by notifying the first error in two places.

In addition, the game table described above is
The first notification means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detecting means while the second error is detected by the second error detecting means (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"). The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed (for example, FIGS. 53 (B) (2)).
In the second case, the cause of the first error is removed and the cause of the second error is caused while the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed. When the release operation is performed once after the removal of the above, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued (for example, FIGS. 53 (B) (3)).
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above game console, even if two types of error factors have been removed, it is possible to improve security by prompting the administrator to confirm each error location by gradually canceling the error. ..

In addition, the game table described above is
The second notification means is a means for executing the first error notification in the second case but not executing the second error notification (for example, FIGS. 53 (B) (2)). ,
It may be a game table characterized by that.

In the above-mentioned game console, it may be possible to improve security by notifying the first error in two places.

≪Others≫
In the present embodiment, as an example of the game table, the slot machine 100 using a medal (coin) as a game medium is shown, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a game ball (for example, a pachinko ball) is used for playing a game. It can be applied to slot machines, pachinko machines, arrange ball game machines, rock game machines, smart balls, etc. as media.

The slot machine is a slot machine that operates on mobile terminals (smartphones, game machines) and personal computers by a program that simulates the operation based on the above configuration, and only exchanges electronic data without using medals. In this case, the game medium includes electronic data corresponding to a medal, and the game medium is input from a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). The payout of the game medium includes outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device).

Although the present embodiment has been described above, the present embodiment is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and various modifications and changes can be made to the embodiment of the present invention without departing from the gist of the present invention. , Such modifications and alterations are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. Further, the actions and effects described in the embodiments of the present invention merely list the most suitable actions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the actions and effects according to the present invention are described in the embodiments of the present invention. It is not limited to what has been done.

The game console according to the present invention may be applied to a game console typified by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning machine (slot machine), an enclosed game machine, or a medalless slot machine. can.

100 Slot machine 110-112 Reel 113 Design display window 130-132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137-139 Stop button 156 Direction button 157 Production image display device (LCD display device)
300 Main control unit 400 1st sub control unit 500 2nd sub control unit

Claims (1)

Error detection means that can detect errors and
The first notification means that can execute error notification,
A second notification means that can execute error notification,
A game console provided with a predetermined operating means capable of canceling the error notification.
The error detecting means is
Includes a first error detecting means capable of detecting a first error and a second error detecting means capable of detecting a second error.
The first notification means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detecting means, it is possible to execute the first error notification notifying that the first error has been detected.
When the second error is detected by the second error detecting means, it is possible to execute a second error notification notifying that the second error has been detected.
When the second error is detected by the second error detecting means while the first error is detected by the first error detecting means (hereinafter, referred to as "first case"). The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed.
In the first case, the cause of the first error is eliminated and the cause of the second error is caused while the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed. If the release operation is performed once after the removal of the above, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued .
The second notification means is a means for executing the first error notification in the first case but not executing the second error notification.
The first notification means is
When the first error is detected by the first error detecting means while the second error is detected by the second error detecting means (hereinafter, referred to as "second case"). The first error notification can be executed and the second error notification can be executed.
In the second case, the cause of the first error is removed and the cause of the second error is caused while the first error notification and the second error notification are being executed. If the release operation is performed once after the removal of the above, the first error notification is terminated while the second error notification is continued.
In the second case, the second notification means is a means for executing the first error notification but not executing the second error notification.
A game table featuring that.

Images